JP2019146604A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase game interest.SOLUTION: Game control means (game control device 100) for comprehensively controlling a game can set a fanfare period which is from the start of a special game state to the start of opening of a special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38, second special variation winning device 39) and an ending period from the end of opening of the last special variation in the special game state to the end of the special game state. Even in the special game state on the basis of the same special result, it is possible to vary the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period according to the game state when the special result is derived.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the game becomes a special result.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In this pachinko machine, a variable display game is executed based on a game ball winning at a start opening provided in the game area (start winning prize), and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. A state is generated (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-223632 A

  At the start and end of the special gaming state, a certain stage is provided and various presentations can be performed.However, the contents to be shown to the player in relation to the special gaming state often differ depending on the gaming state, It was not possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the game simply by performing the production. An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result,
Game control means for overall control of the game;
A special variable winning device that is opened in the special gaming state,
The game control means includes
A fanfare period, which is a period from the start of the special gaming state to the start of opening of the special variable winning device;
It is possible to set an ending period that is a period from the end of opening of the last special variable winning device in the special gaming state to the end of the special gaming state,
Even in the special gaming state based on the same special result, it is possible to vary the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period according to the gaming state when the special result is derived. It is characterized by being.

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a change in the number of abnormal fluctuations. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an abnormal change notification is performed. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port 1 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port 2 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process transition setting process. FIG. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port 1 signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol determination frequency signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a jackpot command processing. It is a figure explaining the symbol arrangement | positioning of each reel. It is a figure explaining a decoration special result. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode of the decoration game in a low probability state. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode of the decoration game in a high probability state. It is a figure explaining an example of the decoration game in a specific execution mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation at the time of the small hit occurrence in a low probability state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation at the time of the small hit occurrence in a high probability state. It is a figure explaining an example of alerting | reporting in an alerting | reporting part. It is a flowchart explaining a count effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an alerting | reporting information setting process. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by a game point. It is a figure explaining the decoration special result in a 1st modification.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

  Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12. In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 including a variable display device 4 and a display device 41, which are one of the board effect devices 44 and have rotatable reels 6a, 6b, 6c, is arranged. Yes. The variable display device 4 and the display device 41 are attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the periphery of the variable display device 4 and the display device 41, protrudes forward from the variable display device 4 and the display device 41, and is formed to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32. .

  The variable display device 4 displays a decorative special figure fluctuation display game that stops and displays a plurality of pieces of identification information after the reel 6 is operated in response to the special figure fluctuation display game. The variable display device 4 can visually recognize a symbol that is variably displayed by the operation of the reel 6 from the symbol display window 5 (window portion). The reel 6 includes a cylindrical left reel 6a, a middle reel 6b, and a right reel 6c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 6a, 6b, 6c so as to be arranged along the circumferential direction. Each reel 6a, 6b, 6c is provided with a reel motor, which is a stepping motor, so that each reel 6a, 6b, 6c can be operated independently. That is, the reel motor serves as an electrical drive source for driving the reels 6a, 6b, 6c.

  By operating the reel 6 by the reel motor, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 5 are varied so as to circulate from top to bottom, for example, and fluctuate so as to sway (variable display). ). On the other hand, in a state where the reel 6 is stopped, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols, that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, are displayed through the symbol display window 5 for each reel 6a, 6b, 6c. And is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 5, the effective display portions of the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the decorative special figure variation display game can be visually recognized. Therefore, the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c form a plurality of variable display units that can display a plurality of symbols in a variable manner.

  A predetermined effective line is set for a 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 5. In the present embodiment, the upper line crossing the upper symbol of each reel 6a, 6b, 6c, the middle line crossing the middle symbol, the lower line crossing the lower symbol, the left reel 6a lower stage-middle reel 6b middle stage-right reel 6c upper stage. A line that crosses each reel 6a, 6b, 6c diagonally (upward to the right), a line that crosses each reel 6a, 6b, 6c diagonally (upward to the right) from the upper stage of the left reel 6a, the middle stage of the middle reel 6b, and the lower stage of the right reel 6c. Is an active line. The result is displayed according to the symbol combination mode (outgoing) formed on the effective line.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display), a CRT (CRT), or the like. In an area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to the game such as a character that produces a special figure variation display game and a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, a board effect device 44 is provided at the upper part of the center case 40 to effect a game by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41. Further, on the right part of the center case 40, there are a first notification unit 72a, a second notification unit 72b, a third notification unit 72c, and a fourth notification unit 72d as a notification unit 72 including LEDs that can emit light in a plurality of colors. Is provided. This notifying unit 72 has a function of notifying the number of derivation of special results during an advantageous period, which will be described later, in which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls, and acquired from the end of the special gaming state to the derivation of the next special result. A function for notifying information relating to the number of winning balls, and notifying such information according to the light emission mode of the LED.

  In the upper left part of the center case 40, there is provided a point notifying unit 73 for notifying game points given by satisfying a predetermined condition in the game. The point notification unit 73 includes four display units of 10,000 points, 5000 points, 1000 points, and 100 points, and each is provided with an LED. When notifying the game points to be given, each display unit is sequentially turned on like roulette, and then the corresponding display unit is turned on. FIG. 2 shows that 100 points have been awarded.

  In addition, a cumulative value notification unit 74 indicating a cumulative value of game points acquired in a predetermined period is provided in the lower left part of the center case 40. Furthermore, above the cumulative value notifying unit 74, an expectation notifying unit 75 for notifying the expectation that the special figure variation display game is a big hit by the acquired game points is provided. The expectation level notification unit 75 includes five light emission units, and lights up the light emission units according to game points acquired in a predetermined period, and notifies that the higher the number of lightings, the higher the degree of expectation.

  In the game area 32, three general winning ports 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning port 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 7).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 7). Further, a second start winning port 37 (start winning port, start winning region) for providing a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game is provided at the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32. A game ball won in the second start winning opening 37 is detected by the start opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 7).

  In the game area 32, a gate 34 is provided on the lower right side of the center case 40 to give a condition for starting a special game state. The gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34 a that can detect a game ball passing therethrough. . The special game state is started when the game ball passes through the gate 34 after a special result that is a big hit in the special figure variation display game is derived. Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, on the right side of the first start winning opening 36, a game ball can be converted into a state where it is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. One special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is provided.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from the closed state (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, an upper prize winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by an upper prize winning solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7) as a driving device. In the special gaming state based on the above, the upper prize winning opening is converted from the closed state to the opened state, thereby facilitating the inflow of gaming balls into the upper winning prize opening and allowing the player to obtain a predetermined game value (the prize ball). ).

  An upper prize port switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 7) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper prize port is disposed inside the upper prize port (winning area). Yes. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two upper prize winning port switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning port is detected by any one of the upper prize winning port switches 38a. As described above, by providing a plurality of upper prize winning port switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball flowing into the upper prize winning opening.

  Directly below the first start winning port 36, a second special variable winning device (lower large winning port) 39 that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. Has been. The second special variation winning device 39 includes an opening / closing door 39c that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side.

  The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 includes, for example, a lower big prize opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by a lower big prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 7) as a driving device. In the special gaming state based on the above, the lower prize winning opening is converted from the closed state to the opened state, thereby facilitating the inflow of gaming balls into the lower major winning prize opening, and allowing the player to obtain a predetermined game value (the prize ball). ).

  A lower major prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 7) is provided inside the lower major prize opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening. . Also, below the second special variable winning device 39, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  The arrangement of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, the second special variable winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper side or the lower side of the first special variable winning device 38 in FIG. In this case, it may be completely overlapped vertically, or it may be shifted to the left and right and only a part may overlap vertically. Further, the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the attacker type, and other types such as a slide type that can open the grand prize opening by sliding a plate-like member capable of closing the big prize opening. It may be in the form of

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim to win the first start winning opening 36 by firing the game ball to the left game area by adjusting the firing force (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area By so-called “right-handed”, it is possible to aim for winning in the second start winning opening 37 and the first special variable winning device 38. It should be noted that the second special variation winning device 39 can be aimed regardless of whether the game ball is fired in the left or right game area.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game, and a batch of various information are displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

  The collective display 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 fluctuation display for a special figure 1 fluctuation display game constituted by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. A special figure 2 display (second special figure fluctuation display part) 52 for a game and a memory display part 54 for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game constituted by LED lamps are provided.

  Further, the collective display device 50 has a round display section 55 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening / closing the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39), left-handed (normal hit) and right-handed The first game state display unit 56 that notifies the player of the batting that is advantageous to the player (the batting method corresponding to the gaming state), and the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game is notified. A probability display portion 57 is provided. The collective display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. A unit (display) or the like may be provided. Further, the ordinary variation display game is executed as in a conventional gaming machine, and a normal starting point that constitutes a second start winning opening through which the game ball can be awarded based on the specific result of the ordinary variation display game When equipped with a variable winning device, a general map display for displaying a general variable display game, a memory display for notifying the start memory number of a general variable display game, and a lighted time when a short time occurs A short time state notifying unit or the like may be provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is performed on the display device 41 The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked in addition to the central segment. The fact that it is changing is displayed so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. When the result of the game is “out of”, as a result mode of out of game, for example, the central segment (in the case of Special Figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on, and the result of the game is In the case of “winning”, the game results are displayed with the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the off-result mode being turned on as the winning result mode (special result mode).

  The memory display unit 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = reserved number) out of the number of winning balls to the first starting winning port 36 which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. Displayed by lighting (blinking). The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when not in the special gaming state, all the LEDs are turned off, and during the special gaming state, the LEDs are displayed corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. Turn on the light. The round display unit 55 may be configured with a 7-segment display.

  For example, the first game state display unit 56 turns off all the LEDs in a gaming state where the player is more advantageous to the left player than the right player (normally hitting), and is right-handed rather than left-handed. When the game state is more advantageous for the player (right-handed), all the LEDs are turned on. The probability display unit 57 turns off all LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and turns off all LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability variation state). Turn on the.

  FIG. 3 shows the probability of jackpot and jackpot, the probability of jackpot type when winning the jackpot, and the sort probability of jackpot type when winning the jackpot. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off in software, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

  The jackpot probability, which is the probability of being a big hit (first special result), is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the probabilities in the normal gaming state which is the low probability state and the specific gaming state which is the high probability state are respectively illustrated. The probability is as shown in 3 (a). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the first special result is derived in the low probability state for the first time, and the first special result is derived in the period until the number of times of deriving the first special result is five. Is configured to do. A low probability state is set after the end of the special gaming state based on the first special result for the fifth time. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. This small hit probability is higher in special figure 2 than in special figure 1. The small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the lottery for the big hit and the small hit, the big hit and the small hit do not overlap.

  FIG. 3 (c) shows the types of jackpots that can be selected in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the special variable winning devices and distribution probabilities that are released for each jackpot type, and FIG. 1 and 2 show the types of small hits that can be selected, the special variable winning device that is opened for each type of small hit, the opening time, the number of times of opening, and the distribution probability. With regard to the small hit 2, it is possible to derive either the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The small hits may be set only in the special figure 2 without being provided in the special figure 1.

  4 and 5 show the variation pattern of the special-figure variation display game. FIG. 4A shows a variation pattern when the result is out of order in a low probability state. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for winning in the first start winning opening 36 by left-handed and aim for winning in the second starting winning opening 37 by right-handing. It has become. That is, it is possible to select which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly executed according to the player's intention. In addition, depending on the gaming state, the game is designed assuming that the game progresses mainly in one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. According to this design, the player plays the game. In order to progress, it is configured such that it is advantageous for a player to play a game mainly in one of the special figure variation display games determined to be main in design. In the following description, one special figure fluctuation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as main fluctuation, and the other special figure fluctuation display game may be referred to as irregular fluctuation.

  In the low probability state, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is designed as a main fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is designated as an irregular fluctuation. In order to allow the player to proceed with the game in accordance with this design, for Special Figure 2, regardless of which variation pattern is selected, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a higher probability of small hits than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The execution of the variable display game in FIG. 2 is made inefficient in terms of time, and in the low probability state, the game is progressed mainly in the special FIG. 1 variable display game.

  FIG. 4B shows a variation pattern when the result is out of order in a high probability state. In this case, only one variation pattern is selected. In this high probability state, contrary to the low probability state described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set as the main fluctuation, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set as the irregular fluctuation.

  Here, the fluctuation time in the case of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game that is irregular fluctuation in a high probability state is a deviation result in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is irregular fluctuation in a low probability state. Is set shorter than the fluctuation time (see FIG. 4A). This is because, as will be described later, a short time is set as the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a big hit or a small hit in the high probability state.

  In other words, in the high probability state in which the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and can be executed efficiently in time, the special figure 1 variable display game with a low probability of small hit is clearly disadvantageous, Even if a long fluctuation time is not set, the game can be progressed mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game for the player. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game may not be set longer than necessary. However, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed simultaneously, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is mainly used. In order for the game to proceed, it is forced to stop by a big hit or a small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game as a sufficiently long fluctuation time with respect to the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  FIG. 5A shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in a low probability state. For the special figure 2, only the variation pattern that does not generate the reach state can be selected. In the low probability state, the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit may be longer than the fluctuation time that can be selected when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit. FIG. 5B shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in a high probability state. In either case, a reach state is not generated, and a very short variation time variation pattern is selected.

  In particular, with regard to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, a short fluctuation time is selected in comparison with the fluctuation time that can be selected when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit. This increases the possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation even in the high probability state stops before the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that becomes the main fluctuation, and the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game However, the possibility that the result is forcibly removed and changed to a result is reduced. In addition, although the distribution of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is performed according to the above-mentioned type of jackpot, it may be determined by a random number or the like.

  FIG. 5C shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in a low probability state. As for the special figure 2, a long fluctuation in which a fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected without generating a reach state. FIG. 5D shows a variation pattern when the result is a small hit in a high probability state. In either case, a reach state is not generated, and a very short variation time variation pattern is selected. For the special figure 1 variable display game, the time is the same as in the case of a loss in the high probability state. It's enough time to be done. In the high probability state, when the special figure 1 variable display game is out of play or a small hit, the fluctuation time is sufficient to be forcibly stopped by the big hit or small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. The time shown here may be shorter.

  FIG. 6 shows a special variable winning device in a special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on a small hit (second special result). The opening and closing pattern was shown. In the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, when the big hit type is 16R big hit, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened according to the top big prize opening / closing pattern 1. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, an opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). Thereafter, a round in which an interval period of 2000 ms and an open period of 29000 ms are set is repeated up to 16 rounds, and after the ending period of 11000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends. Further, when the big win type is 10R big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened according to the top big prize opening / closing pattern 2. This opening / closing pattern is different from the opening / closing pattern for 16R jackpot only in the number of rounds.

  In addition, the time described in the interval period and the ending period in each open / close pattern is a time obtained by adding the remaining sphere processing time and the interval time or ending time. For example, the interval period in the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the second half is the interval time. Further, the ending period in the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the second half is the ending time.

  The opening / closing pattern of the small hits includes a fanfare period, an open period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure. The device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Also, in any open / close pattern of big hits and small wins, when a prescribed number of winnings are made in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that point. The opening time for the small hit is shorter than the opening time for the big hit, and the number of winnings in the special variable winning device in the special gaming state is reduced. Therefore, a small hit has a lower game value that can be given to the player than a big hit. That is, the special results include a first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special gaming state and a second special gaming state that has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special gaming state. A possible second special result (small hit) is included.

  The opening / closing pattern of the small hits is configured such that the length of the fanfare period and the ending period differ depending on whether or not it is in a specific gaming state, and is longer in the case of a specific gaming state. As will be described later, in the specific game state, in order to perform effects such as notification of small hits and notification of the number of winning balls by winning, these times are secured. In addition, since small hits occur frequently in specific gaming states, the fanfare period and the ending period are lengthened to increase the time required to digest the special gaming state so that the number of winning balls per unit time does not increase too much. Yes. Further, the opening time of the special variable winning device is the same regardless of whether or not the specific gaming state is set. Here, in each small opening / closing pattern, only one opening is performed, but a plurality of opening can be performed. In this case, the interval time for temporarily closing the special variable winning device is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the specific gaming state.

  It should be noted that although both the fanfare period and the ending period are made different depending on whether or not they are in a specific gaming state, only one of them may be made different. Also, regarding the jackpot opening / closing pattern, one or both of the length of the fanfare period and the ending period may be made different depending on whether or not the game state is a specific game state.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). In addition, when the first special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the big hit and the second special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the small hit are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special gaming state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first start winning opening 36, wins the second start winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32 Is done. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of the winning winning port is set. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 7) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

  A winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special FIG. 1 variable display game by a start opening 1 switch 36a provided therein, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) Is stored in the limit. When the game ball wins the first start winning slot 36 in a state where the special figure 1 variable display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the first start memory is generated with the start right. Is stored, the first start memory number is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is immediately started based on the first start memory. At this time, the first start memory number is decremented by 1. . On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended or is in a special gaming state In addition, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 36, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first start memory number is incremented by 1 and one first start memory is stored. . When the first start memory number becomes 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the previous special figure 1 variable display game ends or the special game state ends). The start memory number is decremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

  A winning ball to the second starting winning port 37 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by a start port 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, when a winning is made to the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state has been entered. Even if a game ball wins the second start winning opening 37, the second start memory is not generated. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, if there is a winning at the second starting winning opening 37, the second starting memory is generated once for convenience of processing. Since it is immediately digested, the second start memory for deferring the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur.

  Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 7). Is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times for the first start memory). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the start display number storage display unit 54 (special figure 1 hold indicator) of the collective display device 50 and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 plays the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first fluctuation display device) based on the winning to the first start winning opening 36 or the first start memory, and the second start. Based on the winning in the winning opening 37, the special figure 2 display game is performed by the special figure 2 display 52 (second fluctuation display device). The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time. While one of the special figure fluctuation display games is being executed, the other special figure fluctuation display game has a special result (big hit or small hit). If it becomes, the one special figure variation display game is ended as a result other than the special result (out-of-order result).

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (a big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. The first special gaming state (so-called big hit state) is entered based on the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 34 and is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 7). In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, a special result form (small hit result form) in which the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special gaming state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first fluctuation display means capable of displaying a first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) based on winning of a game ball in the first start winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second fluctuation display means capable of displaying a second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37.

  Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the variable display device 4 or the display device 41 displays various types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. The special figure variation display game to be executed is executed. The decoration special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, a variation display is performed in accordance with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and a display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special diagram variation display game.

  In other words, the variation display device 4 and the display device 41 variably display the decoration identification information corresponding to the first variation display game (Special Figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (Special Figure 2 variation display game). A decoration fluctuation display means capable of displaying a decoration fluctuation display game (decoration special figure fluctuation display game) is provided. It should be noted that separate display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of small hits, but in the normal game state that is in a low probability state, the fluctuation time is as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. A very long (about 10 minutes) long variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time in the normal gaming state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at winning a small hit in the normal gaming state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to make a left turn and aim at the first start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game. Although the long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

  When the big hit occurs and the special gaming state is reached, the first special variable winning device 38 can be aimed by right-handed. In addition, when the 2nd special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus 39 is open | released in the special game state based on a big hit or a small hit, it can aim at right-handed or left-handed. After the special gaming state based on the big hit, there is a case where the specific gaming state is a high probability state. In this specific gaming state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short, so it is advantageous for the player to perform the special figure 2 variable display game by making a right turn and aiming at the second start winning opening 37. It becomes. In the specific gaming state, the special variable winning device based on the small hits and the special variable winning device based on the big hits occur frequently, and the player can acquire a large amount of game balls.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37), and the game results in a special result, In the gaming machine 10 that generates a special game state advantageous to the user, game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and a special variable prize device (first special variable prize) that is released in the special game state Device 38, a second special variable winning device 39), and the game control means includes a fanfare period that is a period from the start of the special gaming state to the start of opening of the special variable winning device, and the last in the special gaming state. It is possible to set an ending period that is a period from the end of opening of the special variable winning device until the end of the special gaming state, and even in a special gaming state based on the same special result, The fact that as it is possible to vary the one or both of the length of the fanfare period and ending period according to the game state when the 該特 another result was derived. Therefore, it can be set as the execution mode according to a game state, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  Further, the first variation display game is executed based on the winning of the first starting prize port 36 that forms the starting prize port, the second starting prize port 37 that constitutes the starting prize port, and the winning of the game ball to the first starting prize port 36. First variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) and second variation display game execution control means (game control device) for executing a second variation display game based on winning of a game ball in the second start winning opening 37 100) and specific game state generation means (game control device 100) capable of generating a specific game state in which the execution time of the second variation display game is set to be shorter than the normal state. The length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period in the special gaming state based on the same special result, the special result than when the gaming state when the special result is derived is not the specific gaming state Gaming state when derived is the better in the case where the specific game state so as to be longer. Therefore, it can be set as the execution mode according to a game state, and the interest of a game can be improved. For example, it is possible to secure a time for performing an effect in the specific game state, and to rapidly advance the game when the game state is not the specific game state.

  The special results include a first special result that can change the probability derived according to the gaming state, and a second special result that has a constant probability derived regardless of the gaming state, The probability that the second special result is derived is higher than the probability that the first special result is derived. Therefore, it can be set as the execution mode according to a game state, and the interest of a game can be improved. In particular, by changing the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period for the second special result that does not change the probability, the execution mode can be changed although the derivation probability does not change.

FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generator 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in this embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, Based on the starting memory number or the like, one of the variation pattern tables is selected from the plurality of variation pattern tables and acquired. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36a in the first start prize port 36, and a start port 2 in the second start prize port 37. A plurality of (1 to x, two in this embodiment) upper prize port switches 38a and second special variable prize device 39 disposed in the switch 37a, the prize port switch 35a, and the first special variable prize device 38. Connected to the lower big prize opening switch 39a and the gate switch 34a in the gate 34, a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is inputted, and a positive logic of 0V-5V An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided for converting the signal. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper large winning port switch 38a, the lower large winning port switch 39a, and the gate switch 34a are the detection signals. 2 is input to the input port 123. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, each data of the input unit 120 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open / close data of an upper large prize opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38 and a lower large prize opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variable winning prize apparatus 39. Is output. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the upper large prize opening solenoid 38b and the lower large prize opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal (driving). Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current draw side of 50, and a third driver 138c that outputs an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. Four drivers 138d are provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, the upper prize port switch 38a, lower large prize opening switch 39a, and gate switch 34a are provided with a magnetic detection coil, and a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor that detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. (Hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as production control command signals (production commands ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). . The board decoration device 46 includes a point notification unit 73 for performing effects relating to game points, a cumulative value notification unit 74, an expectation level notification unit 75, and a notification in an advantageous period (to be described later) in which the player can acquire a large number of prize balls. An informing unit 72 is also included.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 ( Board effect movable that drives and controls a board effect device 44 (for example, the variable display device 4 and a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) provided in the center case 40). A body control circuit 334 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), sound source LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps and motors, etc., are output from main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. The effect control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the effect control device 300 is powered on.

  In these control circuits, on the basis of the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning port 36, the random number for jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is extracted. The first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The random number value for determining the big hit in the first start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit or variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning prize port 37, the random number for determining the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and stored in the second RAM 111C. Store the starting memory. The random number value for determining the big hit in the second start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed. The second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, and temporarily stores information necessary for starting the special figure 2 variable display game. The special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on winning in the start winning area (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37) of the game balls flowing down the game area 32. Make a means.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the variation display device 4 or the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, and also displays the special game. Performs processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special game state, for example, the CPU 111A can open the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the upper prize winning solenoid 38b, and allow the game ball to flow into the upper prize winning opening. Control. Alternatively, the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened by the lower big prize winning solenoid 39b, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the lower big prize winning opening.

  Then, the special winning opening is opened until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins the special winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. Opening is defined as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the low probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9, first, a stack pointer which is the start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs after a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step X1) is performed. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) is set. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and a process for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step X8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step X9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits for the power to the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step X12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, when the standby time has ended, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step X14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step X16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17). If so (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (eg, A5h) (step X18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 10 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step X21 of FIG. 10, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

  Thereafter, a power failure recovery command corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X22). Proceed to X28. In this embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As for the screen designation command, if both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are in normal processing, which will be described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is neither being executed nor being in a special game state, the customer is waiting. Send a waiting demo screen command, otherwise send a recovery screen command. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step X25). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X26). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Then, the RAM initialization command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X27, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are displayed. And a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  In step X28, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step X28, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is the replacement method when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) An initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step X30), and an interrupt is permitted (step X31). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain an illegal random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X32) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. It is a “low speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle. The big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number employ a so-called “initial value changing method” in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step X32, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step X33). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X34). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step X32). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X32) (step X31), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step X32 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step X35; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step X36), all Processing to output off data to the output port (step X37) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step X38), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step X39). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X41), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X42) ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) includes When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 11 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19 and X40) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step X53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 12 shows the initial value random number update process (step X32) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is the special figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 13 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). At Step X102, the same processing as Step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step X103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, output processing (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, lower large winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed based on output data set in various processes. In addition, when the signal for stopping the firing is output in step X5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105), a random number update process 1 (step X106), and a random number update process 2 (step X107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper large winning port switch 38a, and the lower large winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring. A prize opening switch / state monitoring process (step X108) for performing (such as whether the front frame or the glass frame is open) is performed.

  Next, a start port switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 37. And the special figure 1 game process (step X110) which performs the process regarding a special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) which performs the process regarding a special figure 2 fluctuation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display games and various information related to the game to display desired contents, and a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) that performs processing to check whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the board, and board fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality A monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, external information editing processing (step X115) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (step X122), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S122). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X126), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and a switch reading process (step X128) is performed.

Thereafter, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X131), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), switch reading processing (step X133) is performed, and the input processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.
In addition, as information about the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted, information prepared for each input port is used.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps X128 and X133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step X144). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step X146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area (Save) (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second readings, and a different bit is 0 (step X150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 is calculated. The confirmation bit is set (step X151).

  Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the same bit in the first and second reads is set to 0, and a different bit is set to 1 (step X152). The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise caused by switch chattering or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step X154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step X155), The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process at a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step X104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 7) for outputting the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (step X162).

  Then, the digit counter value for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the digit counter value is acquired (step S163). X164), the acquired information and the external information data are synthesized (step X165). Then, the combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step X168).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and combined (step X169), the combined data and the output data for launch permission are combined (step X170), and the combined data is output for external information output. Output to the port 137 (step X171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step X175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176) and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area for each of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 15 winning balls). Accordingly, 1 is added to the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area based on the winning at the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter is counted. The number of payouts corresponding to the area is acquired (step X185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added to obtain a new prize ball remaining number (step X186), and the result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step X187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result, which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, the result of the subtraction is not saved in the prize ball remaining area, so the value before the subtraction is stored in the prize ball remaining area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step X191). Return to Step X188.

  As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information in which whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal is set in an idle state in which payout control can be started immediately, payout Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal flag area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  If the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. In this case, it is determined that the busy state is also in an indefinite state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  If the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether the count number has been checked (step X197). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step X198), a payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the winning areas provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the general winning port 35, the first special variable winning device 38). , A game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the second special variable prize winning device 39), and a game based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) that performs payout control of the ball, and the game control means outputs a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. Based on (busy signal), a control is performed to transmit a prize ball command to the payout control means. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, a status signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means Is output In response to the fact that the prize signal is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the state signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control is continuously output for a predetermined period. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game area 32 has different winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39). A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) is provided for each prize ball number, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls is transmitted. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). Before the identification of whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. I will do it.

  In addition to performing overall game control, a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39). ) A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to the game ball, and a payout control for performing game ball payout control based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. Means (payout control device 200), and the game control means can start the payout control with a status signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is won in a predetermined prize area. Prize ball containing information about And an external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the number (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means is configured so that the status signal output from the payout control means is a payout control means. The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second start winning port 37, general winning port 35). The first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39) generate a prize ball command as a unit, and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) is configured to transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200). Is memorable Updates are made when a game ball is won in a predetermined winning area, and the number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating the game ball in response to the transmission of a prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 18 shows the random number update process 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

  If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). When the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. Set to a register (start value setting register) that holds a start value of a random number counter (random number area) to be executed (step X223). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small hit symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 19 shows the random number update process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step X233). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) The mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value is set, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step X237), and the process proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step X238), and proceeds to step X239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240). The process proceeds to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower 1 byte of the random value. ) Is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

  In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step X243). If the new random value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step X244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step X247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A, among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area of the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 37, changes the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 20 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one upper large winning opening switch 38a in the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step X301). The illegal & winning monitoring process (step X302) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  The winning mouth monitoring table (illegal monitoring table) includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the illegal winning number area, and an illegal winning error. Information of a notification command, an illegal winning number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence determination), an address of a winning mouth switch table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. The winning opening switch table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), monitoring switch bits, the winning counter area 1 address, and the winning counter area 2 address. These fraud monitoring tables and winning tables are prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower large winning opening switch 39a in the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is prepared (step X303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning. A fraud & winning monitoring process (step X304) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (in this case, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) (step X305). The winning number counter updating process (step X306) is performed. Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process for monitoring the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state scheduled to be executed mainly by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step X307).

  Next, the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step X308). This state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X309). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X310) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like can be performed. When the value of the state scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the state based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

  Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X312) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on a signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and state scanning is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, the state monitoring based on the frame radio wave improper signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (step X313). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X314), and a gaming machine state check for judging a state such as an error has occurred. Processing (step X315) is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch or the like can be performed. Is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step X316) for setting a busy signal flag based on a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. To do. Note that the processing from step X314 to X316 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from step X314 to X316 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 21 shows the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps X302 and X304) in the above-described prize opening switch / status monitoring process. This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process that is performed on each of the two upper big prize opening switches 38a of the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize opening switch 39a of the second special variable prize winning device 39. As for the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39), since it is easy to be fraudulently forcibly opening the door and inserting the game ball and paying out the prize ball, the fraud is monitored in addition to the detection of the prize. .

  In this fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step X321) to determine whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the error monitoring target winning port switch is the upper large winning port switch 38a. When the switch is the lower large prize opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch (step X323). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not (5) has been exceeded (step X325).

  The number of judgments is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is valid for the large winning opening switch This is to prevent the player from judging that the player has won a prize or the noise has been added to the signal, and not to judge it as an error easily.

  If the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step X325; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). When the number of determinations is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step X326), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area (step 6326) X327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step X328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and a winning number counter updating process (step X331) for setting a winning ball is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step X333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is permitted to be updated (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the error monitoring target prize opening switch is one of the upper prize winning opening switches 38a, and is permitted when the error monitoring target prize opening switch is the other upper prize winning opening switch 38a. Not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the first special variation winning device 38 and time-up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . Note that when the prize port switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large prize port switch 39a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step X336), and an illegal win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( In step X339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step X340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step X340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step X340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step X341), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step X342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 22 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps X306 and X331) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port switch table of the winning port monitoring table (step X351), and input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, the change in input). ) Is determined (step X352).

  If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step X362). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). If no overflow has occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). ). When an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step X359). If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), It is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step X362). If an overflow has occurred (step X359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X362).

  When the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step X362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X352). If all the switches have been monitored (step X362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 23 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the production serial transmission buffer (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374). Then, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X376), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal Variation Monitoring Processing]
FIG. 24 shows the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (step X307) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state which is in the low probability state, but the player who does not know this. Alternatively, it is conceivable that a player who intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game makes a right strike. In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, a process for informing such a player to make a left strike is performed.

  The abnormal fluctuation here means irregular fluctuation, which is a non-main special figure fluctuation display game. Even in the normal gaming state, it is possible to win the second start winning opening 37, so even if it is irregular fluctuation, it is a legitimate special figure fluctuation display game, using a game ball or magnet with a thread, radio wave This is different from an illegal act in which a special figure variation display game is executed by illegally detecting a winning by, for example, launching a game. However, it is not preferable that the special figure fluctuation display game is continuously executed in the special figure fluctuation display game determined to be the main in the design of the gaming machine. Here, such irregular fluctuation is detected. The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is counted, and when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches a specified value, a corresponding process is performed. Of course, even when a special display 2 variation display game in which irregular winning is detected by illegally detecting a winning at the second start winning opening 37 by using a game ball or magnet with a thread, or by emitting radio waves, etc. is also executed. 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations is counted. That is, regardless of whether or not it is a fraudulent act, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is irregular fluctuation is executed, the number of abnormal fluctuations in the special figure 2 is counted.

  In this special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, it is first determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is a flag that is set when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. If there is no special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; N), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). If there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; Y), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X382), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (step X383).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 18) (step X384), and if smaller than the prescribed value (step X384; Y), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag. Determination is made (step X387). In addition, when it is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number added when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability state) must be zero. For example, -1 is updated (step X385), the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X386), and it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). The minimum value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to zero.

  The special figure 2 check flag is a flag that is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. In determining whether there is the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387), if there is no special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387; N), the process proceeds to step X390. If there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X388), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by +1 (step X389). 2. It is determined whether the number of abnormal fluctuations is smaller than a specified value (for example, 5) (step X390).

  That is, the special figure 2 check flag is set based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game which is a non-main variable display game (irregular fluctuation) in a low probability state. Based on this, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number forming the abnormality determination number is updated (added here) in the abnormality occurrence direction. Also, the special figure 1 fluctuation number that makes up the number of abnormality cancellations based on the start of the main fluctuation display game (main fluctuation) is updated (added here), and the abnormality determination number based on the fact that the number of abnormality cancellations satisfies a predetermined condition The number of abnormal fluctuations in Fig. 2 is updated (subtracted here) in the direction of canceling the abnormality. Therefore, the game control device 100 serves as an abnormality determination number management means for updating the abnormality determination number in the direction of occurrence of abnormality based on the start of the non-main variable display game.

  When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is not smaller than the prescribed value (step X390; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to the prescribed value -1 (step X391), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is set to the initial value ( For example, 60000 ms) is set (step X392). Next, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and the process proceeds to step X399. In this case, the player makes a right-hand hit and the player makes a right-hand hit even though it is a normal game state (low probability state) in which it is recommended to advance the game mainly by the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 shows a case where a variable display game is being executed, and a process for notifying the player to make a left strike is performed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is updated by -1 (step X395), and it is determined whether the time is up (step X396). ). If the time is not up (step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. When the time is up (step X396; Y), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag is prepared (step X397), and a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is prepared (step X398).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prepared flag is the same as the current special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation flag area value (step X399). If the prepared flag and the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area value are the same (step X399; Y), that is, if there is no state change, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared flag and the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area value are not the same (step X399; N), that is, if there is a change in state, the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag. (Step X400).

  If the prepared flag is not the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (step X400; N), that is, if it is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step X402), the effect command setting process is performed, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (step X400; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X401), and then the processing of steps X402 and X403 is performed. (Step X403), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300 along with the detection of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is issued along with the cancellation of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation. 300, the start and end of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification will be set.

  FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 show an example of the process by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process accompanying the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is 3 and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is 15 in the normal gaming state. When the next special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started from this state (t11), the special figure 1 fluctuation number changes from 15 to 16. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t12), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number changes from 3 to 4.

  Thereafter, each time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by one (t13, t14). Here, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches the specified value 18 (t14), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 to change from 4 to 3, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0. The Similarly, every time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches a predetermined value 18 (t17), The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 to change from 3 to 2, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to zero. That is, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted every time a specified number (18 times here) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed.

  FIG. 26 shows a case where the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed. In this example, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 3 in the normal gaming state. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started from this state (t21), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated from 3 to 4. Further, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t22), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches a predetermined value of 5.

  Thereby, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, and based on this flag, output of external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred and the gaming machine error status signal to the device outside the gaming machine is started, The occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation can be grasped by the management device of the amusement store or the like. Also, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by display or voice. That is, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 serve as a response means for performing a predetermined response based on the fact that the abnormality determination number (the number of abnormal fluctuations in Fig. 2) satisfies a predetermined condition (becomes a specified value).

  Further, when the number of abnormal fluctuations in the special figure 2 reaches a predetermined value of 5, the time measurement by the abnormal fluctuation notification timer in the special figure 2 is started (t22), and a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses ( t23), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error state signal is stopped. Further, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is transmitted to the production control apparatus 300, and the production control apparatus 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the reception of this command.

  The number of abnormal fluctuations in special figure 2 reaches a specified value (here, 5) and is determined to be a predetermined value -1 (here, 4) after it is determined that the abnormal fluctuation in special figure 2 has occurred. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is newly started before the lapse of the predetermined time, the special figure 2 fluctuation number becomes the specified value, and the measurement of the predetermined time is newly started from that point. As a result, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed despite the fact that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred, the notice period is extended accordingly.

  Thus, by determining that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaching a specified value (for example, 5), for example, a game ball enters the game area on the right side unintentionally. Thus, when the second start winning opening 37 is won, it is possible to prevent immediately from determining that there is an abnormal fluctuation in the special figure 2. Furthermore, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation which occurred about the winning to the 2nd start winning opening 37 which is not intended because the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the predetermined number of times was made to be subtracted. The number is canceled if a game is subsequently played, and it is possible to prevent a mere mistake or a result of another player's game from accumulating and determining that there is a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation.

  Note that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number for which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed and the special value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number for performing the process of subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number are arbitrary. It can be set. Each specified value set here may be any value as long as it can prevent the player from aiming to start the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state. Also, when a power failure occurs and is restored, monitoring is resumed from the state before the power failure occurred. Even if special figure 2 abnormal change notification is performed, the payout of the winning ball for winning is performed as usual.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 27 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps X310, X312 and X315) in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step X451), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table. This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, and the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in case of error system, error notification end command), status on command (in case of error system, error notification start command), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer A comparison value is included.

  If the target signal is not on (step X452: N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step X453), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step X454). Thereafter, a target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). The case where the target signal is not on (step X452: N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and that the signal from the touch switch indicates that the signal is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, if the target signal is on (step X452: Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step X456), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step X457). Thereafter, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is on (step X452: Y), this is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step X459; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step X459; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step X460). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step X463).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of comparison value -1 (step X464). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step X465).

  When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step X465; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X467), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 28 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X316) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). When the payout busy signal is on (step X471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X474), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X475). .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state region is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether or not there has been a change of on and off (step X476), and if they are the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If they are not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step X477), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X478), and the busy signal monitoring timer is set. +1 is updated (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the previously set ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value, that is, the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step) X480).
If the signal determination time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the signal determination time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by −1, and the previously set ON determination monitoring timer comparison value or OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value is −1. (Step X481), the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (Step X482), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  By this processing, a busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a start port 1 (first start winning port 36) winning monitor table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on winning in the first start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

  When the information on the presence of the start opening prize is not set based on the winning at the first start winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, if the information on the start opening winning is set based on the winning at the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the low probability is in effect (step X494). And when it is in low probability (step X494; Y), it transfers to step X497. If the probability is not low (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X496). After that, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and special figure start port 1 switch processing is performed (step X498).

  In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the right-handed instruction notification for instructing the player to make a right-handed strike is performed by display, voice, or the like. When the player is in the high probability state, the right-handed player is more advantageous for the player. Right-handed instruction notification is performed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (second starting winning port 37) (step X499), hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X500), and the big hit random number is calculated based on the winning to the second starting winning port 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when acquired (step X501).

  If the information on the presence of the start opening prize is not set based on the winning at the second start winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, when the start opening prize presence information is set based on the winning to the second start winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether the probability is high (step X502). And when it is in high probability (step X502; Y), it transfers to step X507. If the probability is not high (step X502; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is being hit, that is, the first special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the jackpot (step X503).

  If it is a big hit (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If it is not a big hit (step X503; N), a left hand instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X506). After that, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X507), special chart start port 2 switch processing is performed (step X508), and the start port switch monitoring processing is terminated.

  In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the left-handed instruction notification for instructing the player to left-hand is displayed by display or voice. When the player is in the low probability state, the left-handed player is more advantageous for the player. A left-handed instruction notification is performed. In the first special game state, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, so that the left handed instruction notification is not performed even in the low probability state.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
FIG. 30 shows a hard random number acquisition process (steps X492 and X500) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process. In this hard random number acquisition process, first, start opening no winning information is set (step X511), and it is determined whether there is an input to the target switch (step X512).

  If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. When there is an input to the target switch (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the big hit random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X515). Then, the start opening winning presence information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 31 shows the special view start port 1 switch process (step X498) in the start port switch monitoring process described above. In this special figure starting port 1 switch process, first, the number of times of starting port signal 1 output, which is the number of times the information related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 36 is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded. (Step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (Step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (Step X523). If the output count does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output count area (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold count (first start storage count) Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but if the upper limit is stored, looping by +1 update results in 0, so the updated value is not saved.

  When the special figure 1 holding number is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (step X525; Y), a special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of the variation pattern in the special figure holding information determination process described later is set ( Step X526), the special figure 1 holding number is updated by +1 (Step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process described above is used as the RWM big hit random number. Save in the storage area (step X529).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hit design random number is extracted and saved in the small hit design random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, a special figure hold information determination process (step X534), which is a pre-read process, is performed to prepare a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (step X535), and an effect command setting process is performed ( Step X536), the special figure starting port 1 switch processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) can extract a predetermined random number based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and store the predetermined random number as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. A first start storage means is provided.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X534) in the special figure start port 1 switch process described above. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory. In this special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is in effect (step X541). If it is in a high probability state (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. . If not in the high probability state (step X541; N), it is determined whether or not the big special hit state, that is, the first special game state which is a special game state based on the big hit (step X542).

  If it is a big hit (step X542; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not being hit (step X542; N), a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not (step X543). If the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not (step X547). ). If the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), stop symbol information for small hit is set (step X549), and a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the stop symbol information for the outage is set (step X550), and a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  After preparing a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), an effect command setting process is performed (step X552). Next, special figure 1 information setting processing (step X553) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing is performed (step X554).

  Then, pre-reading variation pattern commands corresponding to the first-half variation number indicating the first-half variation pattern and the second-half variation number representing the second-half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game are prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X556), and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 normal process. It is the same.

  By the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory and the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory are included. A prefetch variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether big hit or small hit or variation pattern type) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is used as the special figure 1 fluctuation based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory. The effect control device 300 can be notified before the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game starts. It becomes possible to notify the player of the result related information before the timing.

  That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. A possible first determination means. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

  This special figure hold information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. Also, the prefetch process is not performed when the probability is high. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly performed during the high probability state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly removed from the special figure derived by the special figure 2 variable display game. It is because it is almost stopped at. In other words, because most of them are out of date, it is not meaningful to notify the pre-reading result, or after the pre-reading result that is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game is notified, it is forcibly changed to the out-of-order result. This is because a contradiction may occur.

  However, the special figure 2 variable display game does not generate a start memory for deferring the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. There is a high possibility that only the display game is played. In such a case, a pre-reading effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first start memories that perform such pre-reading effects, pre-reading processing is performed for those that occurred before the start of the specific gaming state, so the results are used to determine what occurred after the start of the specific gaming state. The prefetching process is performed on the target of such prefetching effects. Of course, the prefetch process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined whether or not to perform a prefetch effect based on the result of the prefetch process in another process.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 33 shows the special start port 2 switch process (step X508) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 2 switch process, first, the start port signal 2 output count, which is the number of times information related to the number of wins to the second start winning port 37, is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 is loaded. (Step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (Step X562), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (Step X563). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 2 output count area (step X564), and the start port 2 (second start winning port 37) wins. Determine if it is invalid.

  The start port 2 winning is invalid means that the special figure 1 variable display game that has a special result (big hit or small win) is stopped (during special figure display processing described later), in the first or second special game state, and The special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. When the start port 2 winning is invalid (step X565; Y), the special drawing start port 2 switch process is terminated. If the start port 2 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the special figure 2 holding number is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for the special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), The jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process described above is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, the small hitting design random number is extracted and saved in the small hitting design random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure starting port 2 switch process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a start winning storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the second start winning opening 37. Note that the variation pattern random number 1 is not used for the special figure 2 variation display game because there are few variation patterns.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. The control of the whole process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the special figure 1 display are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, during the special game state that is executed based on whether the special figure 2 big hit / small hit is in effect, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or small hit. Is determined (step Y101).

  If the special figure 2 is not in big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y103). ). If the big hit / small hit shown in FIG. 2 is in effect (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

  In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, the game balls of the upper big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize port switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 are played. A process for monitoring detection is performed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and the subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y106), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 1 game process number (step Y107).

  If the special figure 1 game process number is “0” in step Y107, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 1 Special processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation is performed (step Y108). When the special figure 1 game process number is “1” in step Y107, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process is shown. One fluctuation processing (step Y109) is performed.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit, A special figure 1 in-display process (step Y110) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, updating of the number of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y111) to be performed is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is “4” in step Y107, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if the final round is a final round, A special winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening or the special figure 1 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game process number is "6", special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big prize opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process. The small hitting fanfare process (step Y115) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “8”, a small hitting process (step Y116) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is “10” in step Y107, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process is performed.

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and a symbol fluctuation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 ends the game process. This special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control related to the first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 35 shows a special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the whole process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled and the display of the special figure 2 is set. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

  In this special figure 2 game process, first, during the special game state which is executed based on whether the special figure 1 big hit / small hit is in effect, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit or small hit. Is determined (step Y131). Then, if the special figure 1 is not big hit / small hit (step Y131; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated ( Step Y133). Further, when the big hit / small hit shown in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

  In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, the game balls of the upper big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize port switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 are played. A process for monitoring detection is performed. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, is the special figure 2 game processing timer repeated 0? Is determined (step Y135).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is long. The variation timer value (here 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

  In order to prevent a player from intentionally executing a special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of occurrence in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the variation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of measuring the specified time (here 60000 ms).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game process timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register. (Step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y137), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 2 game process number (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “0” at step Y138, the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 2 Special processing (step Y139) for performing setting of information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation is performed (step Y139). When the special figure 2 game process number is “1” in step Y138, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 2, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2. Processing during fluctuation (step Y140) is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the big hit type, A special figure 2 display process (step Y141) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “3” in step Y138, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y142) to be performed is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “4” in step Y138, an interval command is set if the big win round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if it is the final round, A special winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, or special figure 2 The big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

  In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is “7”, to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the mid-small process The small hitting fanfare process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “8” at step Y138, the small hitting process (step Y147) for setting the ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “9” in step Y138, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “10” in step Y138, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary process is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. FIG. 2 ends the game process. This special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control related to the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). The above special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
FIG. 36 shows the special winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102 and Y132) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this big prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper big prize opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) is being opened (step Y159). If the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y159; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. If the upper prize winning opening is not open (step Y159; N), it is determined whether the upper ball winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step Y160). It should be noted that the remaining ball processing in this determination includes both large winning opening remaining ball processing based on big hits and small hit remaining ball processing based on small hits.

  When the remaining ball processing of the top prize winning opening is being performed (step Y160; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. In addition, when the remaining ball process of the upper prize winning opening is not being performed (step Y160; N), it is determined whether the lower major winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is being opened (step Y161). If the lower prize winning opening is not being opened (step Y161; N), the big prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. If the lower major prize opening is being opened (step Y161; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch (step Y162).

  It should be noted that during release in steps Y159 and Y161, the special game state based on the first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and the special game state based on the second special result (small jackpot). Including both being released in the second special gaming state. Further, in the determination of steps Y159 to Y161, determination may be made with reference to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set. You may make it determine based on this flag.

  If there is no input to the lower prize winning switch (step Y162; N), the big prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the lower prize winning opening switch (step Y162; Y), 1 is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize added in the current big prize opening switch monitoring process. (Step Y163), a big winning mouth count command is prepared to perform an effect by winning (Step Y164), an effect command setting process is performed (Step Y165), and the process proceeds to Step Y175. If there is a remaining ball processing for the lower prize winning opening, even if there is an input to the lower big winning prize switch during the remaining ball processing, the big winning prize count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Anyway.

  On the other hand, when the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y161; Y) or when the remaining ball processing of the upper prize winning opening is being performed (step Y162; Y), the winning counter is set to 0. Set (step Y166). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (one upper prize winning switch 38a) (step Y167). If there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

  If there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (step Y167; Y), a prize winning count command is prepared to produce an effect by winning (step Y168), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y169). ). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper large prize opening switch 2 (the other upper big prize opening switch 38a) (step Y171).

  If there is no input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (step Y171; N), the process proceeds to step Y175. If there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (step Y171; Y), a prize winning count command is prepared in order to produce an effect by winning (step Y172), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y173). ). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

  Thereafter, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step Y176; Y), or when the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step Y177; Y). If it is any of the above, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step Y176; N), and the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step Y177; N), the winning is achieved. The value of the counter is added to the number of winning prizes (step Y178), and it is determined whether the number of winning prizes is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y179).

  When the number of the big winning mouth count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (9 in this case) (step Y179; N), the big winning mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the number of the big winning mouth count is kept at the upper limit (step Y180), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether the game is being released in the big hit, that is, in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the big hit (step Y182).

  When the big hit is not being released (step Y182; N), that is, when the big hit is being opened, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, when the big hit is being released (step Y182; Y), the big hit opening operation end value is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 1 routine process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can be changed (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game that is a big hit or the small hit to the end of the special gaming state. In addition, while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  When the special figure 1 is not ready to be changed (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 routine process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 routine process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). When the left hand instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been completed (step Y202; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y204). Thereafter, a left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is used when the special game state based on the first special result for the fifth time counted from the derivation of the first special result in the low probability state ends, that is, the player can acquire a large number of prize balls. It is cleared when the advantageous period ends, so that a left-handed instruction notification is made when shifting to the normal gaming state in which the special figure variation display game is executed in a low probability state.

  If the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. If the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step Y206; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y208). After that, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing for setting information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y210), and a special figure special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y211). Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step Y212). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is held. The number-of-holds command corresponding to the special figure 1 number of reserves minus 1 is prepared.

  Next, the special figure status area is set (information addition) during special figure 1 fluctuation (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed, Special figure status 2 shows a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, special figure status 3 shows a state in which both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed, and special figure status 4 is a first special gaming state which is a special gaming state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether the high probability state is being reached (step Y213). And when it is in a high probability state (step Y213; Y), it transfers to step Y216. If not in the high probability state (step Y213; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 routine process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Regular Processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 ordinary process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to change (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit or small hit, to the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  When the special figure 2 cannot be changed (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 ordinary process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 2 can be changed (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is based on the winning when the second starting prize opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. The special figure 2 is generated temporarily to start the variable display game, and is not for suspending the start of the special figure variable display game as in the first start memory.

  If the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a change start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for setting information on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and special figure 2 fluctuation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is in effect (step Y227). And when it is in a high probability state (step Y227; Y), it transfers to step Y230. If not in the high probability state (step Y227; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. Thereafter, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). If special figure 1 is not changing (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y233). If not disclosed (step Y233; N), the customer waiting state is set. Performs processing related to settings. Further, when the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (step Y231; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y), or when the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y233; Y). Then, the process proceeds to step Y237.

  In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y234), and a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235). Command setting processing is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By setting the customer waiting demo command to correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

  In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 that does not have a backup function loses game state information, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to produce an effect according to the gaming state from the reception of this command, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed simultaneously, and the probability state may be changed by the processing for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Therefore, a variation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). Thereby, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state in the effect control device 300.

  In addition, since the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started, even when the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the gaming state is performed from the reception of this command. It is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the gaming state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state to be transmitted. In addition, you may make it include other information for returning to the production | presentation according to a game state, when the production | presentation control apparatus 300 restarts in a customer waiting demo command or a change start probability information command.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the special figure 1 ordinary process described above. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. First, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of place information. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern 1 information setting process (step Y244) is performed, and a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step Y245).

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. Thereafter, a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed simultaneously.

  Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Display Game and Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display Game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small win) is derived, the other is forcibly disregarded regardless of the lottery result As a result, it ends. In particular, since the special figure 2 variable display game has a high probability of being a small hit, if the special figure 2 variable display game stops first, such a process is likely to be performed for the special figure 1 variable display game. . Therefore, for example, in spite of a highly anticipated effect in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game is forcibly stopped due to the result of the loss, and the player has a distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will be finished before the special figure 1 variable display game to be started is finished, a production with high expectation may not be selected, In the case where a special outcome of big hit is derived in the display game, it is possible to take measures such as setting a specific execution mode for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game executed by the variable display device 4.

  For this purpose, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is present (step Y248), and if it is a high probability state (step Y248; Y), the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated. In the case of a high probability state, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game. In this state, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and frequently executed, it is known that there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the result of detachment. In the special figure 1 variable display game, since a highly anticipated effect is preset so as not to be selected, no special processing is performed here.

  If the high probability state is not being reached (step Y248; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249). If the special figure 2 is not changing (step Y249; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated. In this case, since it is in a low probability state, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started from now on, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a very long fluctuation time. Therefore, since it is unlikely that the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly stopped, the process for preventing the highly anticipated performance from being selected is not performed here.

  When the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249; Y), it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being executed is out of order (step Y250). ) Ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is not out of step (step Y250; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game process timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated. In this case, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game is finished first, so that a highly expected production is not selected. No processing is performed.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 fluctuation display to be executed from now on. It is determined whether the game variation time is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; Y), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game is finished first, the process for preventing the production with the high expectation is not selected.

  Further, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), the fact that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is longer is notified. A command is prepared (step Y255), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y256), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated. This command includes information on whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. In the production control device 300, based on receiving a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer, the production control device 300 restricts the selection of the production with high expectation for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or performs a specific execution. Processing such as setting an aspect is performed.

  When the variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) is set. Processing for resetting information related to the variation pattern (first and second half variation pattern numbers, etc.) may be performed to change the variation control pattern so that the production control device 300 does not select a production with a high expectation. In the process of resetting the variation pattern, the variation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process (step Y255) for preparing a command for notifying that the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 is longer may be performed or may not be performed.

  That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern process (step Y246) performed in the game control device 100 determines the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal gaming state. First variation mode determination means is provided that can determine the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Furthermore, the process for resetting the variation pattern performed in the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determination means. Is being executed, with reference to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game, information regarding the variation pattern can be obtained without changing the variation time of the first variation display game that has been determined. It constitutes a second variation mode determination means that can be determined again.

  Also, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed when the fluctuation pattern is decided in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of determining whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254) is performed, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You may do it.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the special figure 2 ordinary process described above. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. First, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of place information. The big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special symbol 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern 2 information setting processing (step Y264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y265).

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y267) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

  In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that can be executed simultaneously is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, and the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with few results. However, similarly to the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game is forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation, the selection of the production with high expectation may be restricted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 41 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step Y273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 which is a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y275), and if it is a big hit (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. To do. In other words, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed simultaneously are prevented from being a big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is a big hit (step Y277; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step Y279) is performed to determine whether or not.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y 279) is a small hit (step Y 280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y 271 and saved. (Step Y281), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not the small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure big hit random number storage area is cleared to zero.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 as a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. To do. In other words, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed simultaneously are prevented from being a big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed for determining whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the lost information is saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291 and saved. (Step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 43 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y276 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, the judgment result is set to be off (step Y317), and the big hit determination processing is terminated. Note that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the lottery is lost. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step Y313).

  If it is in a high probability state (step Y313; Y), an upper limit determination value with high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). If not in the high probability state (step Y313; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). .

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, the judgment result is set to be off (step Y317), and the big hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step Y318), and the big hit determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 44 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279 and Y299) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). Note that “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and not more than the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. In addition, the loss as the determination result indicates that the lottery is lost. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the special figure 1 information is being set, that is, whether the special figure 1 variable display game is being determined. (Step Y322).

  If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y322; N), that is, if the judgment is for the special figure 2 variable display game, a small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y327), and the small hit determination process is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol saving area (step Y334). The big hit type is selected by this processing. Note that the special figure 1 variable display game stop symbol is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result is forcibly changed to the result.

  After that, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. It is saved in the special figure 1 big prize opening release information area (step Y338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  On the other hand, if it is not big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol. A small hit design random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step Y340). Next, a special symbol 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol saving area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped in the special symbol 1 stop. The design pattern area is saved (step Y345), and a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 1 command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and an effect command setting process (step Y348) is performed. This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350). The small symbol symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is performed on the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361). If it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the big hit symbol random number is stored from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area. Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area (step Y364). The big hit type is selected by this processing. Note that the special symbol 2 variable display game stop symbol is saved not in the special graphic 2 stop symbol area but in the special graphic 2 stop symbol save area when a special result is derived in the special graphic 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result is forcibly changed to the result.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. It is saved in the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  On the other hand, if it is not big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369). If it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol A small hit design random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, a special symbol 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area (step Y374), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped for the special symbol 2 stop. The design pattern area is saved (step Y375), and a special decoration figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 2 command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and an effect command setting process (step Y378) is performed. This decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
FIG. 47 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y244) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability is present (step Y401). When the probability is not high (step Y401; N), a variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y403). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, whether the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

  If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412. If the special figure 1 big hit is not found (step Y404; N), it is judged whether the special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step Y405). If the special figure 1 is not small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step Y407. When the special figure 1 is small (step Y405; Y), the special figure 1 holding number is added to the latter half offset data to update the value (step Y406), and the special figure 1 holding number is added to the first half offset data. The value is converted by addition (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408). If the special figure 1 is not the big hit (step Y408; N), the first half offset data for the high probability probability special figure 1 deviation / small hit is set (step Y409), and the special figure 1 length fluctuation second half offset data is set. Set (step Y411). In the case of special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), the first half offset data for high probability special figure 1 big hit is set (step Y410), and the latter half offset data for special figure 1 length fluctuation is set. (Step Y411).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413). The setting process ends.

  That is, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state, in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation pattern considering the special figure 1 holding number is determined for both the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern, and in the case of a loss In the case of the first half variation pattern, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 holding number, and in the case of big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 holding number. Further, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the specific gaming state, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 holding number.

[Special figure 2 information setting process]
FIG. 48 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y264) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a high probability (step Y421). When the probability is high (step Y421; Y), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y422), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y423). ), The process proceeds to step Y428.

  On the other hand, when the probability is not high (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit (step Y424). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y424; N), the low-probability special figure 2 is set for the first half offset data for losing / small hits (step Y425), and the special figure 2 length fluctuation second half offset data is set Set (step Y427). In the case of special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; Y), first half offset data for special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y426), and latter half offset data for special figure 2 length fluctuation is set. (Step Y427).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y428), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y429), and the special figure 2 information is saved. The setting process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Setting Process]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and an address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. 1 and prepared (step Y453).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is out of sync, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuous stop symbol pattern (step Y454). (Step Y455), the process proceeds to Step Y457. If the special figure 1 is not shifted (step Y454; N), a sorting process is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but when the result is out of order, the distribution value is 2 bytes to enable a variety of effects.

  Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. To prepare (step Y458). Then, a sorting process (step Y459) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second half variation number (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. Preparation is made (step Y464).

  Then, a sorting process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the whole period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now is set.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Setting Processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the latter half fluctuation selection address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area of FIG. 2 and prepared (step Y473).

  Next, a sorting process is performed (step Y474), the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y475). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Then, the first half variation group table is set (step Y476), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second half variation number (step Y477). Next, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y478), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of FIG. 2 and prepared (step Y479). ).

  Then, a sorting process (step Y480) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is terminated. The first half variation pattern is set by this processing, and the variation pattern for the whole period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started from now is set. In the special figure 2 variation display game, since there are few types of variation in the latter half, the variation pattern is determined using only the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 without selecting the latter variation group by the variation pattern random number 1.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 51 shows the 2-byte sorting process (step Y455) in the above-described special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared second-half fluctuation group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step Y501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. Since there is no need for distribution in the variation group table, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data address corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process ends. To do. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter half fluctuation group table is not a code without sorting (step Y502; N), the first sorting value specified in the latter half fluctuation group table is acquired (step Y503).

  Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y373 from the loaded random value (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random value Is smaller than “0” (step Y505). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the process proceeds to step Y503 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired in step Y503, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number determined in step Y505 as a new random value, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 52 shows the distribution process (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step Y511). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code with no sorting (step Y512; Y), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step Y517), and the sorting is performed. End the process. On the other hand, if the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step Y513).

  Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step Y513 from the loaded random value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) (Step Y514), and then the calculation It is determined whether or not the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process proceeds to step Y513, and thereafter Process.

  That is, in step Y513, after the distribution value specified next in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number value determined in step Y515 as a new random value. Further, a new random value is calculated (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y515).

  The above processing is executed in step Y515 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step Y515 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step Y517), and the distribution process is terminated. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 53 shows the change start information setting process (steps Y247 and Y267) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process and special figure 2 change start process. In this variation start information setting process, it is first determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y551). If the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), The random number storage area (for the hold number 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y551; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the special figure 2 are cleared (step). Y553).

  Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step Y558), and the added value is saved in the target special game process timer area (step Y559).

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state which is in the low probability state is out of play or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, as the above-described addition value, the remaining time (time less than 60000 ms) is calculated as the addition value except for the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions that is the number of times of measuring the specified time (here 60000 ms). It has come to be.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y560). If the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y560; Y), the process proceeds to step Y564. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y560; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y561). The long fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that is set when the result is out of play or a small hit in the normal game state for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and is determined by the set fluctuation pattern number.

  If it is not the start of the long fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and the process proceeds to step Y564. If it is the start of the long fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step Y561; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and the process proceeds to step Y564.

  Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step Y564), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step Y565), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y566). ). Next, it is determined whether the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y567). If the information of FIG. 1 is not being set (step Y567; N), the variation start information setting process is terminated. If the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y567; Y), the number of reserved special figure 1 is updated by -1 (step Y568), and the contents of the random number storage area of special figure 1 are shifted (step Y569). ) Clear the free area after the shift (step Y570), and end the variation start information setting process.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 displays the result of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the variation mode information on the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. The first determination means that can be determined before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37, and the result of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the predetermined random number. And a second determination means capable of determining the variation mode information before the start of the second variation display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where a game ball launched to one side of the game area 32 can be won, and the second start winning opening 37 is fired to the other side of the game area 32. The game ball is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variation display game, and in the normal state (normal game state) The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination unit is larger than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination unit. It will be a long time.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that contain information about patterns. It should be noted that the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . Further, it can be said that the first variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variation display game from the entire special figure 1 game processing. Further, the game control device 100 serves as second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . Further, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variation display game from the entire special figure 2 game processing.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination unit and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination unit. As transmission means that can be transmitted to the production control means (production control device 300). In addition, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time in response to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and the variation time has elapsed, It serves as a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

  In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state which is in a low probability state is out of play or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. Information about time may not be transmitted to the production control device 300, but a command indicating only a long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of a long variation, it is sufficient to simply display the variation, and there is no need to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command indicating the long variation. The variation time is managed only by the game control device 100, and when the variation time ends, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 stops the variable display based on receiving the stop command. Like that. If it does in this way, the burden of control in production control device 300 can be eased.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
FIG. 54 shows a special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 normal process. In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Furthermore, an initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

  The initial value set in the special symbol 1 changing symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display starts from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 ordinary process. In this special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

  The initial value to be set in the special symbol 2 changing symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display starts when all segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

  In addition, when starting the variable display in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is started from a state in which all the segments are turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variable display is started at least from the state in which the segment is lit. You may make it do. Alternatively, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is always turned on. Moreover, the lighting mode at the time of starting a fluctuation | variation by the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same, and may differ.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y622), and an effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step Y623).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is a case where the game machine is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, and therefore, when the fluctuation is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. . Then, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627). Here, a display time of 600 ms is set in the case of loss, 2000 ms in the case of big hit, and 136 ms in the case of small hit.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is out of order, that is, whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (step Y629). If the special figure 1 is out of place (step Y629; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If the special figure 1 is not out of place (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y640. If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 display process is being executed (step Y631). In other words, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped with the result of the detachment based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y633. If the special figure 2 display processing is not in progress (step Y631; N), the symbol determination count output count is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the special figure 1 display time set above as the special figure 2 display time. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y635), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y636). ). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y638), and a special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y639).

  Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step Y640), whether the special figure 1 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y641). If the special figure is a small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If the special figure 1 is not a small hit (step Y641; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y642). ), Information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening information area and saved in the large winning opening information area (step Y643).

  Thereafter, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y645). The displaying process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times output is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded from the special figure 2 command area and prepared (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is executed. Perform (step Y653).

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657). Here, a display time of 600 ms is set in the case of loss, 2000 ms in the case of big hit, and 136 ms in the case of small hit.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is out of order, that is, whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of place (step Y659). When the special figure 2 is out of place (step Y659; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not out of step (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y670. When the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display process is being executed (step Y661). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped by the result of the detachment based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

  When the special figure 1 display process is in progress (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. When the special figure 1 display process is not in progress (step Y661; N), the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by +1 (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), the command is loaded from the special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y665), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y666). ). Thereafter, a special decoration figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y668), and a special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y669).

  Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step Y670), whether the special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y671). If the special figure 2 is a small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not a small hit (step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672). ), Information is loaded from the special figure 2 big prize opening information area and saved in the big prize opening information area (step Y673).

  Thereafter, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y675). The displaying process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 1]
FIG. 58 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y645) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, a special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and a process number is stored in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

  Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), The special figure 1 changing process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 1]
FIG. 59 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, a special figure 2 game process number “2” relating to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and a process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

  Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), The special figure 2 changing process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 60 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, a special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y701), and a process number is stored in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 is displayed. The stop flag related to the change stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step Y704).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, and hereinafter, information for setting a result of the deviation is set. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y706).

  Next, the special figure 1 big opening opening information area is cleared (step Y707), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y710), the shift symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is finished. .

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 61 shows special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, a special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and a process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is displayed. A stop flag related to the change stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y724).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and thereafter, setting of information for obtaining a result of losing is performed. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y726).

  Next, the special figure 2 big winning opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area is cleared (step Y730), the shift stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y731), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is finished. .

  56 to 61, when one special figure fluctuation display game has a special result, the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped by the result of detachment. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of detachment, and the special figure 2 variable display game is determined to have the special result. Based on this, the second end control process in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation is performed.

  From the above, the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variation display game when the execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) for which execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variation display game for which execution control is performed Can be terminated as a result other than the special result, and the second variation display game execution control means is executed by the first variation display game execution control means when executing the execution control of the second variation display game. When the first variation display game being controlled has a special result, the second variation display game performing the execution control can be terminated as a result other than the special result. The Rukoto. As a result, when a special result is derived in one variation display game, the other variation display game can be forcibly stopped by the result, so that no trouble occurs even when simultaneous variation is performed. Can be.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
62 and 63 show the special figure 1 display process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y745), and the small hit flag is set. One area is cleared (step Y746).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y747), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y748). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is the big hit information (step Y749). If it is a big hit (step Y749; Y), the big hit number counter is updated by +1 (step Y755). This big hit count counter manages a specific period in which a high probability state can be set, and becomes 1 when the first special result is derived in the low probability state, and counts the number of times the first special result is derived in the specific period. Is. Next, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON and the special symbol per signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step Y756).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is prepared (step Y757), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal variation notification ends with the occurrence of the first special gaming state.

  Next, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the symbol symbol command area and prepared (step Y762), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y765). In the production control device 300, with the reception of the fanfare command, the production is instructed to aim at the gate.

  Next, a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special winning opening information and the special figure display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the present embodiment, in step Y766, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step Y767), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768).

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y774) and saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y775). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step Y755, if Special Figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, if big hit flag 1 is out of place information, it is determined whether loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y783), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether a high probability is in progress (step Y787).

  When the probability is not high (step Y787; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y787; Y), a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right turn is made.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) (step Y792), and if it is a small hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y792; Y), The upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y793), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper big winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the process proceeds to step Y797. In addition, when it is not a small hit to open the upper large winning opening (step Y792; N), that is, when it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (the second special variable winning apparatus 39), an illegal winning of the lower large winning opening is performed. The number area is cleared (step Y795), the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and the process proceeds to step Y797. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y797) is performed, and the special figure 1 display mid-process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), the special figure status area during the special figure 1 fluctuation is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806). The normal process transition setting process 1 in FIG. 1 is performed (step Y807), and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 show the special figure 2 display process (step Y141) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 display process, a process equivalent to the above-described special figure 1 display process is performed for special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y805), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y806).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step Y807), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y808). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit information (step Y809). If it is not a big hit (step Y809; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. If it is a big hit (step Y809; Y), the big hit number counter is updated by +1 (step Y815), and a test signal (for example, a condition for the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game is started. The apparatus operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is prepared (step Y817), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal variation notification ends with the occurrence of the first special gaming state.

  Next, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the symbol symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y825).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big win in the special winning opening information and the special figure changing display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the present embodiment, in step Y826, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step Y827), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). .

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834) and saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y835). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit at step Y815 (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is missing information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). If the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), a command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y843), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y847).

  When the probability is not high (step Y847; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y847; Y), a signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right turn is made.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) (step Y852). If it is a small hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y852; Y), The upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y853), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning portion fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. In addition, when it is not a small hit to open the upper large winning opening (step Y852; N), that is, when it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39), the illegal winning of the lower large winning opening The number area is cleared (step Y855), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and the process proceeds to step Y857. Then, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 mid-display process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), the special figure status area during fluctuation of special figure 2 is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y866). 2 The normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

  That is, the first special game in which the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is released with the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has reached the first special result. And a second special game generating means for generating a second special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened without the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has a second special result. Make.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 66 describes details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (steps Y776, Y836) in the above-described special figure 1 display process and special figure 2 display process. In this fanfare / interval process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high-probability state and the time-short state (special symbol variation time shortening state) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

  Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), and the number with a low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874). The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the right-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area is saved. The number is saved (step Y881).

  Thereafter, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process is terminated. That is, all the information related to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is cleared with the occurrence of the big hit.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare process transition setting process (step Y797) in the special figure 1 display process described above. In this special figure 1 small hitting fanfare process transition setting process, first, “7” relating to the small hitting fanfare process is set as the process number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893). Here, with reference to the current gaming state, 1000 ms is set as the small hitting fanfare time in the case of the specific gaming state, and 4 ms is set as the small hitting fanfare time in the case of not being in the specific gaming state. Then, a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Furthermore, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol small hit signal is set to ON.

  After that, the small hitting information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hitting display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure one small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y857) in the special figure 2 display middle process described above. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process, first, “7” relating to the small hit fanfare process is set as the process number (step Y901), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y902).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903). Here, with reference to the current gaming state, 1000 ms is set as the small hitting fanfare time in the case of the specific gaming state, and 4 ms is set as the small hitting fanfare time in the case of not being in the specific gaming state. Then, a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

  After that, the small hitting information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
FIG. 69 shows the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether or not the first round (step Y940). If it is the first round (step Y940; Y), it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed to the gate 34 (step Y941). If there is no passage (step Y941; N), the processing during the fanfare / interval is terminated. To do.

  When there is a passage (step Y941; Y), a round number upper limit table is set (step Y942), and the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information (in this embodiment, 16 or 10). ) And saved in the round number upper limit area (step Y943). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y944).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y945). If it is a big hit that opens the upper prize winning opening (step Y945; Y), the upper prize winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y946), and the illegal extra monitoring period flag is set in the upper winning prize illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y947), and the process proceeds to step Y950. In addition, when it is not a big hit to open the upper big prize opening (step Y945; N), that is, when it is a big hit to open the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), the lower big prize opening illegal winning number area Is cleared (step Y948), a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y949), and the process proceeds to step Y950. In step Y950, the on-output data of the in-use-substance continuous actuator operating signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y950), and the process proceeds to step Y951.

  On the other hand, if it is not the first round (step Y940; N), the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y951), and a round command corresponding to the big prize opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y952). An effect command setting process is performed (step Y953).

  Next, the big hit midway processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit middle processing control pointer area (step Y955). Then, the winning opening opening time corresponding to the winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the process number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, 29000 ms.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y959). ), The special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y958; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y961), and the big prize opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area. (Step Y962).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) (step Y963). Whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening can be determined from the set big opening opening information. If it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step Y963; Y), the process setting process 1 for opening the big winning opening is performed (step Y964), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended. Further, when it is not a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step Y963; N), the process transition setting process 2 for opening the big winning opening is performed (step Y965), and the process during the fanfare / interval is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 70 shows the process for setting process 1 for opening the special winning opening during the fanfare / interval process described above (step Y964). In this special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, a signal related to the opening of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper winning port on-data is saved in the large winning port solenoid output data area (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the big winning port is counted. The winning prize mouth count is cleared (step Y973), and the winning prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 71 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step Y965). In this special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, a signal related to the opening of the lower large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the open / close door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39, the lower big prize opening on-data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening is counted. The winning prize mouth count is cleared (step Y983), and the winning prize opening opening process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 72 shows the special winning opening opening process (steps Y112, Y143) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special winning opening opening process, first, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. If it is the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008). I do.

  Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the winning prize opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 related to the winning ball remaining ball processing is set as the process number (step Y1010). As the remaining sphere processing time, 600 ms, 800 ms, or 1400 ms is set. And it is determined whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1011).

  If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1011; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area. (Step Y1015).

  Thereafter, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the special winning opening open process is terminated. In step Y1016, the off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and the process of closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
FIG. 73 shows the big winning opening remaining ball process (steps Y113 and Y144) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this winning ball remaining ball process, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1041).

  If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), a signal related to the end of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the current round number is set (step Y1043), and 3 for the fanfare / interval processing is set as the process number (step Y1044).

  The interval period between rounds is a period from when the remaining sphere processing time elapses from the end of the round to when the interval time elapses after the remaining sphere processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 in FIG. 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, the interval period becomes 2000 ms, and the interval effect is displayed on the display device 41 or the like in this interval period. Is executed.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), a big hit end process transition setting process is performed (step Y1045), and an ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1046), 6 for the special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process is set as the process number (step Y1047).

  And it is determined whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1048). If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y1048). Y1050), the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1048; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the special winning opening remaining ball processing is terminated.

  The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is a period from the end of the final round until the ending time elapses after the remaining sphere processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 on the special figure 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms. During this ending period, the display device 41 or the like produces an ending effect. Is executed.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 74 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In this jackpot end process transition setting process, first, a signal related to the end of opening of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step Y1072), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Information on the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

  Then, the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is cleared (step Y1075), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information of the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 75 shows the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 big hit ending process, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure 1 ordinary process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1104). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF.

  Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1105), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1106), and the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag is saved. The fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the area (step Y1107), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1108). Note that clearing the special figure status area results in a special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1109).

  By performing the special figure 1 big hit end process, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interruption process, the special figure 2 game is executed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the process, a special interrupt process that starts the special figure fluctuation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game process by the timer interruption that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end process. Will be able to start first. Therefore, in step Y1109, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area, so that the start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interruption. In other words, the second variation display game execution control means is the second variation display game execution control means until the first variation display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variation display game after the game control device 100 ends the special gaming state. A game process standby means is provided for preventing the execution of the process relating to the start of the two-variable display game.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit number counter is an upper limit value (step Y1110). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first special result is derived in the low probability state for the first time, and the high probability state is set after the special gaming state is completed until the first special result is derived five times. It is configured. The big hit number counter counts the number of times the first special result is derived, and is 1 when the first special result is derived in the low probability state, and the upper limit is 5.

  When the value of the big hit number counter is not the upper limit value (step Y1110; N), processing for setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (special symbol variation time reduction state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1111). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON. Note that the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1112). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number having a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1114). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the time is always short during high probability, these numbers are not distinguished from each other and are numbered with high probability.

  Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1115), the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1116), and the probability information is stored in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery. The command (high probability) is saved (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the big hit number counter is the upper limit value (step Y1110; Y), processing for setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, the big hit number counter is cleared (step Y1118), and a signal related to the start of the low probability state and the state without time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1119). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the state without time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1120). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to OFF.

  Then, a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1121). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1122). Thereafter, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1123), and the low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1124). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1125), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1126), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 76 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) in the special figure 2 game process described above. This special figure 2 jackpot end process is equivalent to the above-described special figure 1 big hit process except that step Y1109 is not performed. First, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1132).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1133). Here, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1134). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF.

  Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1135), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1136), and the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag is saved. The fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the area (step Y1137), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1138). Note that clearing the special figure status area results in a special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit number counter is an upper limit value (step Y1139). If the value of the big hit number counter is not the upper limit value (step Y1139; N), processing for setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (special symbol variation time reduction state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1140). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON. Note that the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1141). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1142). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number having a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1143). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the time is always short during high probability, these numbers are not distinguished from each other and are numbered with high probability.

  After that, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1144), the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1145), and the probability information is transmitted in the power command recovery transmission command area. The command (high probability) is saved (step Y1146), and the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the big hit number counter is the upper limit value (step Y1139; Y), processing for setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, the big hit number counter is cleared (step Y1147), and a signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the state without time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1148). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to OFF. Next, a signal related to the start of the low probability state and the state without time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1149). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to OFF.

  Then, a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1150). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, a low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1151). Thereafter, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1152), and the low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1154), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1155), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is terminated.

  With these special figure 1 big hit processing and special figure 2 big hit processing, the first special result in the low probability state is first derived, and after the special gaming state ends until the first special result is derived five times. A specific gaming state which is a high probability state is set. That is, the probability setting that allows the game control device 100 to be in a high probability state in which the probability that the game result becomes the first special result of the special results is higher than the low probability state after the special gaming state ends. Make a means. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes a special result is higher than that in the normal state after the special game state ends.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in the small hitting fanfare process, first, branching is performed using an open pattern (step Y1201).

  In step Y1201, if the opening pattern is 1 for small hits (lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1), a command for opening the small hits for lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is prepared (step Y1202). ), An effect command setting process is performed (step Y1203). Next, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1204), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1205).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 1 (here 48 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower big prize opening on data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

  Also, if the opening pattern is the small hit 2 (lower big prize opening opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1201, a lower big winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) opening small hit opening command is prepared ( In step Y1209), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1210). Next, 8 as the process number is set for the small hitting process (step Y1211), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1212).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower big prize opening on data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

  If the opening pattern is 3 in small hits (upper large prize opening opening / closing pattern 3) in step Y1201, the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) is opened. Step Y1216), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1217). Next, 8 as the process number is set for the small hitting process (step Y1218), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1219).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 3 (here, 1200 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper prize winning opening on data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

  In addition, when the opening pattern is the small hit 4 (upper large prize opening opening / closing pattern 4) in step Y1201, a small hitting opening command for opening the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) is prepared ( Step Y1223), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1224). Next, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1225), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1226).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 4 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the top winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process proceeds to step Y1230. After performing processing according to these types of small hits, the big prize count area for counting the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening is cleared (step Y1230), and the small hit fanfare processing is ended.

[Processing during small hits]
FIG. 78 shows the small hit / medium process (steps Y116 and Y147) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this small hitting process, first, a small hitting end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching by an open pattern is performed (step Y1243).

  If the opening pattern is 1 for small hits (lower big prize opening opening / closing pattern 1) in step Y1243, 9 for the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1244), and the special figure 1 game processing number is set. The process number is saved in the area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), and the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247). The hit processing ends.

  If the opening pattern is 2 per small hit (lower big prize opening opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1243, 9 is set as the processing number for the small hit remaining ball processing (step Y1248), and the special figure 2 game processing number is set. The process number is saved in the area (step Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), and the off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251). The hit processing ends.

  If the open pattern is 3 or 4 for small hits in step Y1243 (upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 or 4), 9 for the small hit remaining ball process is set as the process number (step Y1252). The process number is saved in the 2-game process number area (step Y1253). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (here, 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), and the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255). The hit processing ends.

  In steps Y1247, Y1251, and Y1255, off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and the process of closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
FIG. 79 shows the small hit remaining ball process (steps Y117 and Y148) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this small hit remaining sphere process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y1271). When the special figure 1 is a small hit (step Y1271; Y), 10 is set as the process number for the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y1272), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hitting ending time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

  If the special figure 1 is not a small hit (step Y1271; N), 10 is set as the process number for the special figure 2 small hit process (step Y1275), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

  Regardless of the small win in either of FIG. 1 or FIG. 2, the setting of the small hit ending time (steps Y1274, Y1277) refers to the current gaming state, and in the specific gaming state, the small hitting ending 1200 ms or 1400 ms is set as the time, and 100 ms is set as the small hitting ending time when it is not in the specific gaming state. Accordingly, the length of the ending period including the remaining ball processing time and the ending time is 2000 ms when the game state is the specific game state, and 700 ms or 900 ms when the game state is not the specific game state.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Furthermore, the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 80 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 is set as the process number for the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1305), and a round LED is displayed. The turn-off number is saved in the pointer area (step Y1306), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1307). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y1308). If the probability is high (step Y1308; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1311. If the probability is not high (step Y1308; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1309). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1310), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1311). ), Special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended. Again, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area so that the start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interruption process. And the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interruption.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 81 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 is set as a process number for the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). Thereafter, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y1338). If the probability is high (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. If the probability is not high (step Y1338; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 82 shows the symbol variation control process (steps Y120 and Y153) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbol on the special symbol 1 display 51 or the special symbol 2 display 52. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) is changing (Step Y1401).

  If the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step Y1403), and the blinking control timer related to the control target symbol is acquired. -1 is updated (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

  If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the process proceeds to step Y1408. If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), Is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the target fluctuation symbol number area is acquired (step Y1408). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), a symbol display table (for stoppage) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

[Segment LED editing processing]
FIG. 83 shows the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this segment LED editing process, the storage display unit 54 provided in the collective display device 50, a round display for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of opening / closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39). Part 55, first game state display part 56 for notifying the player of the left-handed (normal hit) and right-handed strikes, and the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game. Settings relating to the driving of the segment LEDs constituting the probability display section 57 to be notified are made.

  In this segment LED editing process, first, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X601), and display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is obtained to obtain a segment. Save in the area (step X602). Next, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 55 is defined is set (step X603), and display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X604).

  Then, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the probability display unit 57 is defined is set (step X605), display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X606). After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display state on the first game state display unit 56 is defined is set (step X607), display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area ( Step X608), the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 84 shows the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and fraud notification is set to start or end.

  In this magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on, that is, abnormal magnetism is detected. It is determined whether the detected state is detected (step X611). If the magnet sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has expired. Determination is made (step X613).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614), and the magnet fraud monitoring timer initial value ( Here, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step X616), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N), that is, if no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618) and the magnet fraud notification time is set. If the specified magnet fraud notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X619). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620). Note that if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step X613; N), the process proceeds to step X619.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, and when the fraud notification period has ended, If not, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step X621). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), a production command setting process is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. To do.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 85 shows the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  In this panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor 62 starts from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a. It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (here 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

  Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step X633), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step X634), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, -1 is updated unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is 0 ( Step X635). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step X636).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period has ended, If not, a command to terminate board radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step X637), a board radio wave fraud cancel flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X638), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is set to the board radio wave. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of the illegal flag area (step X639).

  When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X639; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), an effect command setting process is performed (step X641), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring The process ends.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 86 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the external information editing process, the monitoring result in the payout command transmission process (step X105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114), etc. Based on the above, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set it in an output buffer is performed.

  In this external information editing process, it is first determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12) is determined. It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702). If the body frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the security signal OFF data is stored in the external information. The output data area is saved (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

  On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y), or when a body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), the door / frame opening signal is displayed. The on data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are opened is output as external information.

  Next, if the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to −1 (step X707). ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, if the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process goes to step X711. Transition. As a result, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring, which is the detection of abnormal radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12. Is determined (step X709).

  If the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If no frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (step X711). If a switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

  And, magnet fraud is occurring (step X713; Y), board radio wave fraud is occurring (step X714; Y), big prize opening fraud is occurring (step X715; Y), and special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step X716; Y). ), The security data on-data is saved in the external information output data area (step X718), and the gaming machine error status signal on-data is saved in the test signal output data area (step X718). X719), the process proceeds to step X720. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. If none of the errors in steps X713 to X716 has occurred, the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

  Then, a start port 1 signal editing process for editing a winning signal to the first start winning port 36 (step X720) and a start port 2 signal editing process for editing a winning signal to the second start winning port 37 (step X721). Do. Next, a main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) for setting information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol determination number signal editing process for setting information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is performed. (Step X723), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Starter 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 87 shows the start port 1 signal editing process (step X720) in the above-described external information editing process. In this starting port 1 signal editing process, first, if the starting port 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. And it is determined whether the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output count is 0 (step X733).

  If the start port 1 signal output count is not 0 (step X733; N), the start port 1 signal output count is updated by -1 (step X734), and the start port 1 signal output is output to the start port 1 signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X735). The initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the start state (for example, high level) of the start port signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level). (For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. If the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738). ), The start port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736). Note that the fact that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X737. When the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X736; N), the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X738), the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. The start port 2 signal editing process (step X721) in the external information editing process described above is performed for the start port 2 signal in the same manner as the start port 1 signal editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 88 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) in the external information editing process described above. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step X743).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step X743; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is output. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X745). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step X743; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S743). X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X746). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X746; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Design determination frequency signal editing process]
FIG. 89 shows the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step X723) in the external information editing process described above. The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game.

  In this symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination number signal output count updated by +1 every time the special symbol variation display game is completed is 0. (Step X753).

  If the symbol determination number signal output count is not 0 (step X753; N), the symbol determination count signal output count is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main winning ball signal is output to the symbol determination count signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X755). The initial value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (256 ms in this case) of the symbol determination number signal (in this case, high level) and the time (in this case, 300 ms) in the off state (for example, low level). It is time (here 556 ms). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, the on-state time is 256 ms and the off-state time is 300 ms.

  Thereafter, the on data for turning on the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated. Further, when the symbol determination frequency signal output count is 0 (step X753; Y), off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S753). X758), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step X756). Note that the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms). If the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. Further, when the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X756; N), off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 90 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 90, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and an interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interruption process. In this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect contents is performed.

  Then, hall / player setting mode processing is performed for accepting operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update a random number that determines details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

  Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) for editing settings and control for drawing commands. ) To set the end of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for performing control related to the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C18), a board that performs a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the board production device 44, and controls the production by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. An effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 91 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, a command reception counter value that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that the command copy for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). If it is determined that command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. If it is determined that the command analysis for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 92 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  Further, when it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command for an operation related to a small hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the design command range (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what is to be the stop symbol of the special symbol). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239; Y), symbol-related command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as a pending number command and an error command. (Step C241). A single command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C243). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C243; Y), the pre-read symbol command processing (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetched symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the prefetched variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. Pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory (hold) for which the special figure fluctuation display game has not been executed is subsequently executed as a big hit In order to notify the player in advance (or what variation pattern is to be obtained) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a different manner from the normal mode, or the display device 41 For example, an effect display is performed. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command for informing a change pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched in advance, and from the game control device 100 at the start winning prize It is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 93 shows the variable command process (step C236) in the received command analysis process described above. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-described symbol system command processing.

  If this special figure type is unconfirmed (step C361; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. When the special figure type is not yet determined (step C361; N), that is, when the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variation command and the symbol type are determined. It is determined whether they are inconsistent (step C363).

  When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation command processing is terminated. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols. Examples of the symbol type include an off symbol, a 16R big hit symbol, a 10R big hit symbol, and a small hit symbol. The case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent is when performing an effect such as when the symbol command of the 16R jackpot symbol is received even though the variation command (fluctuation pattern command) of the deviation is received. It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variation command and symbol type).

  In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, variation effect setting processing for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

  Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, during the special map change, the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, during a big hit or during a fanfare, etc.). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by −1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command process is terminated.

[Variation production setting processing]
FIG. 94 shows the changing effect setting process (step C365) in the above-described changing command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C381). If the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code and special figure type and the presenting mode is set (step C382). In addition, since it is a fluctuation without reach, the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, and there is no need to particularly refer to the symbol type here. The production mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the production control device 300, and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability variation mode, and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different are provided.

  Next, referring to the first-half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first-order notice allocation group table corresponding to the number of MODE and special figure types is acquired (step C383). As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effects that appear during each change (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of holds. Thereafter, a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice allocation group table (step C386).

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, presentation mode and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half notice distribution group table is used to change the first half. The lottery for the advance notice appearing is performed (step C386).

  Next, the notice effect of the second half change is drawn. Note that the latter half of the special figure fluctuation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a special combination of symbols) in which a display area excluding a specific area out of a plurality of display areas of the special figure is a big hit) Is a variable display in a state in which the variable is displayed only in a specific area. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

  First, a second half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the second half notice allocation group table address corresponding to the ACT is obtained by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

  Thereafter, the contents of the variable effects corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390), and the contents of the effects corresponding to the notice lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, the presentation and notice such as the variation time and main reach contents of the decoration special figure variation display game are determined. Further, stop symbol setting processing for determining a stop symbol with reference to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol variation display game (reach effect, etc.), the notice content, and the game state is performed (step C392).

  Next, the display setting of the fluctuating effect is performed (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C394). With these processes, it is possible to execute effects and notices in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. Thereafter, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to decrease the decoration start memory display corresponding to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game.

  Then, a sound number that is a BGM number and a decoration number that is a number indicating the type of effect produced by a decoration lamp or the like are set (step C396), and a decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display setting is performed (step C397). Furthermore, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decorative special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the fourth symbol variation display setting corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). Then, the variation effect setting process is terminated.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 95 shows single-shot command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information related to the model set in the game control apparatus 100 (step C261). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to a model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing for rewriting internal information with model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and single command processing is performed. Exit.

  If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), whether or not the MODE corresponds to a RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. Determination is made (step C263). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization process is performed (step C264), and the one-shot command process is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), an area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and RAM initialization screen information is set. Furthermore, scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to produce an effect when RAM initialization is performed.

  If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), MODE returns a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has been recovered from the power failure without initialization. It is determined whether it corresponds (step C265). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), the power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect upon power failure recovery.

  If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demo processing is performed (step C268), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the state of the P machine (pachinko machine) is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and the customer waiting scenario data is set to perform the customer waiting effect.

  If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in FIG. 1 suspension (step C269). If the MODE is on the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), a special figure 1 hold information setting process is performed to display a decoration start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41. (Step C270), the single command processing is terminated. When it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271). If MODE is special figure 2 hold (step C271; Y), special figure 2 hold information setting processing for performing processing corresponding to the generated hold is performed (step C272), and single-shot command processing is terminated. To do. That is, the production control device 300 serves as a start memory display means for performing a start memory notification display for displaying information related to the start memory by a start memory display (decoration start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

  In step C271, if the MODE is not the special figure 2 suspension (step C271; N), it is determined whether the MODE is probability information (step C273). If MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE is not probability information in Step C273 (Step C273; N), it is determined whether the MODE is error / invalid (Step C275). If the MODE is error / illegal (step C275; Y), an error / illegal setting process for performing corresponding processing such as error notification is performed (step C276), and the one-shot command process is terminated. In the error / illegal setting process (step C276), a notification process when a command related to an error or fraud is received, a warning display process when a right-handed instruction notification command or a left-handed instruction notification command is received, and the like are performed. .

  If the MODE is not an error / incorrect at step C275 (step C275; N), it is determined whether the MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). If MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching processing for performing effect mode switching processing is performed (step C278), and the single command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE is not effect mode switching in Step C277 (Step C277; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a symbol stop (Step C279). If MODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single command processing is terminated. If MODE is symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C280). In determining whether the command is normal, it is determined, for example, whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is a special figure that is currently changing.

  If the command is not normal (step C280; N), the single command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure is set to stop (step C281). If all symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). The single command processing is terminated. Thereby, the change display of the corresponding decorative special figure change display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state. In addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 96 shows the jackpot command process (step C238) in the received command analysis process described above. In the jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hitting fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). When MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), fanfare effect setting processing for setting a fanfare display image corresponding to the type of jackpot or the jackpot is performed (step C402), and the P machine state is set during fanfare. After setting (step C403), the big hit command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. If the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the number-of-rounds display information and the like is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set to the round (step C406). End the jackpot command processing.

  If the MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to the interval between rounds. If MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting an effect during the interval is performed (step C408), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and a big hit System command processing ends. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round or a small hit end screen command at the end of the small hit.

  If MODE is an ending (step C410; Y), an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect at the end of a big hit or a small hit is performed (step C411), and the P machine state is set to ending (step C411). C412), the jackpot command processing is terminated. If MODE is not an ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether or not the received command is a large winning mouth count command based on winning in the special variable winning device.

  If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated. When MODE is a count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to winning in the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

  Next, game effects will be described. FIG. 97 shows the symbol arrangement of the reels 6a, 6b, 6c. Each reel is provided with identification information of numerals 1 to 9 and identification information of peach symbols. The symbol indicated by a star is a blank symbol and is not a symbol constituting the result mode. FIG. 98 shows a decoration special result which is a special result of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game executed by the fluctuation display device 4. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result, the decoration special result corresponding to the special result is arranged on any effective line. If the result is out of order, the display is such that no special result is displayed on any active line.

  The special result of the decoration is made different in correspondence with the special result depending on the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2). As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and (b), for the 16R jackpot, regardless of the special figure type, the special ornamental result with three odd numbers and the special ornamental result with three peach symbols correspond to 10R. For the big hit, regardless of the type of special drawing, the special result of three even numbers with the same number corresponds. In addition, for the small hits 1 to 4, the special result in which the number “123” is arranged corresponds to the special figure 1, and the special result in which three peach symbols are arranged corresponds to the special figure 2.

The decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the fluctuation display device 4 has a different special figure type depending on whether or not it is in a specific gaming state (high probability state), and corresponds to the main fluctuation according to the gaming state. Display a decoration special map change display game. That is, if the game is not in the specific gaming state, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is displayed. If the game is in the specific gaming state, the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is displayed. Display the game. As a result, the display of the result mode in the variable display device 4 differs depending on whether or not the small hit is in the specific gaming state.

  Further, in the decoration special figure variation display game in the specific game state, the variation mode is selected according to the special result, and the special result can be determined by the variation mode until the decoration special result is derived. In the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 94, a decoration special result to be used is selected depending on whether or not the game state is a specific game state, and a variation mode corresponding to the special result is selected for selection of a variation pattern in the case of the specific game state. I am doing so.

  In addition, although the correspondence of the special result and the decoration special result is different depending on the special figure type, it is not limited to this. For example, the correspondence between the special result and the decorative special result may be different depending on whether or not the game is in a specific gaming state. In addition, although it is not used in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is a so-called latent state in which the probability state is not clearly notified, a closed state where the game ball cannot be won, and an open state where the game ball can be easily won When a convertible ordinary variable prize device is provided at the start prize opening, special results and decorative special results based on whether or not the normal variable prize device is in an open state and the winning is easy. The correspondence may be different. Further, the special results and the decoration special results may be associated with each other based on the effect mode managed by the effect control device 300, or for a predetermined period (predetermined number of games, predetermined time) after the end of the special gaming state. The special result and the special decoration result may be associated with each other in an arbitrary period in such a game or an arbitrary period based on the time information of the RTC 338.

  FIG. 99 shows an example of effects produced by the variable display device 4 and the display device 41 in the low probability state that is not the specific game state. These controls are controlled by the effect control device 300 based on the control information received from the game control device 100, and are mainly set in the variable effect setting process shown in FIG.

  In the low-probability state, the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which is the main fluctuation is displayed on the fluctuation display device 4. In the lower left portion of the display area of the display device 41, a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 for displaying a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is provided. Here, the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is displayed by stopping and displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas. In the lower right part of the display area, a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. Here, the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is displayed by stopping and displaying the identification information in the left, middle, and right variable display areas.

  In the center of the display area, a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration start storage display corresponding to the first start storage is provided. The decorative start memory display displayed here corresponds to the first start memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the storage order, and here, there are four first start memories. The decoration start memory display at the left end is a decoration start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left every time it is digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of pre-reading such as the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to each start memory by the display mode.

  At the center of the display area and to the left of the memory display unit 83, a running memory display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the currently running special figure 1 variable display game is provided. In the in-execution memory display portion 84, the decoration start storage display at the left end of the memory display portion 83 is shifted at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed, the fluctuation pattern, etc. Is suggested by the display mode.

  When the first start memory is digested and decreased from the state shown in FIG. 99 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the first memory display unit 83 is displayed as the in-execution memory display as shown in FIG. 99 (b). The display which flows into the part 84 is performed. Here, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern, etc. are suggested in the same manner as the pre-reading effect also in the running storage display section 84.

  Then, the variation display device 4 starts the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on the first start memory, and the fluctuation display of each reel 6 is started. Also, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 starts the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, and the variable information identification display is started in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.

  Thereafter, first, the left reel 6a of the variable display device 4 stops as shown in FIG. 99 (c), and then the right reel 6c of the variable display device 4 stops as shown in FIG. 99 (d). Here, the same identification information is stopped and reached in each of the right-up line and the right-down line, and the reach effect is started. Of course, different identification information may stop on the active line and not reach. In this way, the fluctuation until the right reel 6c temporarily stops in the reach state is the first half fluctuation, and the latter is the second half fluctuation.

  Then, with the end of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 99 (e), the reel 6b in the variation display device 4 is stopped and all the reels 6 are stopped, and the result is displayed. Here, the decorative special results are not aligned on any of the effective lines, indicating that the results are out of place. Also, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 ends the variable display of the identification information in each of the left region, the middle region, and the right region, and stops displaying the result. The result of outliers is also displayed here. Then, with the end of the stop time, the special figure fluctuation display game and the decorative special figure fluctuation display game are finished. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 99 (f), the display of the running storage display unit 84 is erased, and the next special figure variation display game can be started.

  If there is no start memory in the state of FIG. If the result is the first special result (big hit) in the state of FIG. 99 (f), the first special game state is entered, and the round game in the first special game state is started by passing the game ball to the gate 34. The Rukoto. If the result is the second special result (small hit) in the state of FIG. 99 (f), the decoration special result of “123” is stopped on the active line of the variable display device 4 and the second special game state is displayed. Will be started.

  FIG. 100 shows an example of effects on the variable display device 4 and the display device 41 in the specific game state (high probability state). In the high probability state, the decorative display 2 variation display game corresponding to the special map 2 variation display game which is the main variation is displayed on the variation display device 4. In addition, a decoration special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 for displaying a decoration special figure 1 variable display game is provided in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 41, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display is provided in the lower right part of the display area. A decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 for displaying a game is provided. In the upper right part of the display area, a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration start storage display corresponding to the first start storage is provided. The decoration start memory display displayed here displays the number of the first start memories by numbers.

  At the lower center of the display area, a running memory display unit 84 for displaying information related to the startup memory corresponding to the currently running special figure 2 variable display game is provided. The result, the variation pattern, etc. of the special figure 2 variation display game that is also executed in the in-execution storage display unit 84 are suggested by the display mode. Furthermore, an acquisition number display unit 85 for displaying the number of prize balls acquired in a predetermined period is provided at the upper center of the display area. Here, a prize ball obtained by winning a special variable prize device in a small hit that occurs from the end of a special game state to the start of the next special game state in an advantageous period in which a player can obtain a large number of prize balls. The cumulative value of the number is displayed.

  The state shown in FIG. 100 (a) is a state in which the special game state based on the small hit is completed. In this state, in response to the result of the small hit that caused the special gaming state, the variable display device 4 is in a state where the special display result in which the peach symbols are aligned on the middle line is stopped and displayed as a result mode. The decoration special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 is also in a state in which the result mode of “123” is stopped and displayed in response to the result of the small hit that caused the special game state.

  When a game ball wins the second start winning opening 37 from this state, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and accordingly, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is started. When the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of play or small hit, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the fluctuation display is started so that each reel 6 swings up and down. At this time, each reel 6 moves up and down so that the peach symbol of each reel 6 does not deviate from the range of the symbol display window 5 which is a display area. The execution mode of the decoration special figure variation display game is the first execution mode.

  Then, when the variation time ends, the result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 100 (d), the variable display device 4 stops and displays the decorative special result in which peach symbols are arranged on the effective line as a result mode. The decoration special figure fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display device 4 in the specific gaming state is a decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game as the main fluctuation, and the decoration special result corresponding to the small hit is peach. This is a result mode in which the symbols are aligned. That is, when the result is a small hit, it is possible to recognize that it is a small hit by displaying the decoration special result in a stopped manner after the variable display is performed in the first execution mode. In addition, in the decoration special figure 2 variable display game display section 82, the result mode “123” which is the result mode corresponding to only the small hit is stopped and displayed.

  When the result is out of order, as shown in FIG. 100 (e), the variation display device 4 stops and displays the result form of out of order that the peach symbols do not line up on the active line. Even when displaying the result mode of the loss, the symbol display window in which the peach symbol of each reel 6 constituting the special decoration result of the small hit in the variation special display 2 variation display game in the variation display device 4 is a display area. The result mode which does not deviate from the range of 5 is displayed in a stopped manner. In addition, as a result mode of the detachment, any result mode in which the peach symbols are not arranged on the effective line may be used, and the mode is not limited to that illustrated in FIG. In addition, the result pattern of the loss is also stopped and displayed in the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game started from the state of FIG. 100 (a) is out of play or big hit, the variable display in which each reel 6 rotates in one direction as shown in FIG. 100 (c). Is started. At this time, the peach symbol constituting the special decoration result of the small hit in the variation special display 2 variation display game in the variation display device 4 is out of the range of the symbol display window 5 which is a display region. The execution mode of this decoration special figure fluctuation display game forms the second execution mode.

  Then, when the variation time ends, the result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result is out of place, as shown in FIG. 100 (e), in the variable display device 4, the peaches of the reels 6 constituting the special decoration result of small hits in the special display 2 variable display game in the variable display device 4 As a result, if the symbols are not arranged on the active line at a position that does not deviate from the range of the symbol display window 5 that is the display area, the result mode of the error is stopped and displayed.

  When the result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 100 (f), the variation display device 4 stops and displays the result mode in which symbols corresponding to the special result are arranged on the effective line. That is, when the result is a big hit, it is possible to recognize that it is a big hit by displaying the decoration special result corresponding to the special result after the variable display is performed in the second execution mode. Here, 16R big hit and the special result of “777” are stopped and displayed, but the 16R big hit is also associated with the special result of the same peach pattern as the small hit, and this peach pattern is aligned. In some cases, special decoration results are stopped. In addition, the decoration special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 stops and displays the result mode “777” which is one of the result modes corresponding to only the big hit.

  Thus, by making the variation mode different between the big hit and the small hit, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the type of the special result. In particular, in the specific gaming state, the variation time is shortened and the special figure variation display game is executed at a high frequency, and since the small hits occur frequently and the occurrence interval of the big hits is short, the occurrence frequency of special results is high. Yes. In such a gaming state, the player can grasp the type of special result derived from the time of the variable display, and can afford to turn his attention to the opening of the special variable prize-winning device other than the special display variable display game. Therefore, it is possible to effectively enhance the interest of the specific gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the same special decoration result for big hits and small hits (in this case, a special result for decorations with peach patterns) may be stopped and displayed, but it is possible to determine whether it is big hit or small hit according to the variation mode. .

  In addition, although the 1st execution mode and the 2nd execution mode were shown as the execution mode of a fluctuation | variation display, you may make it provide an execution mode other than this and assign it to a special result. For example, a plurality of execution modes may be assigned to one special result. Further, the execution mode may be different between 16R big hit and 10R big hit. In addition, an execution mode that can be selected in common for the big hit and the small hit may be provided to make it difficult to determine which hit. Further, a specific execution mode may be assigned to a specific special result not only in the specific game state but also in other game states.

  In addition, as for the special decoration results in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display section 81 and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82, the special decoration result shown in FIG. 98 (a) is used regardless of the gaming state. Thus, the special result type can be discriminated even in the specific gaming state, but the decorative special result shown in FIG.

  In addition, the first execution mode and the second execution mode are different from each other in whether or not the peach symbol constituting the special decoration result of the small hit in the variation special display 2 variation display game in the variation display device 4 falls outside the range of the symbol display window 5. However, other differences are also different execution modes. For example, in the first execution mode, the reel 6 operates in the direction opposite to the forward direction, whereas in the second execution mode, the reel 6 operates only in the forward direction. In the first execution mode, the reel 6 operates without making one revolution, whereas in the second execution mode, the reel 6 makes one revolution.

  In addition, the operation mode of the reel 6 may be different between the first execution mode and the second execution mode. For example, both the first execution mode and the second execution mode can be operated so that the reels 6 are swung. In the first execution mode, all reels 6 are operated so as to swing, whereas in the second execution mode, Only some of the reels 6 may be operated so as to swing, and the other reels 6 may be rotated. In addition, the operation direction of each reel 6 may be different between the first execution mode and the second execution mode. In the first execution mode, all reels 6 operate in the opposite direction, whereas the second execution mode. Then, all the reels 6 may be operated in the forward direction. Further, the number of reels 6 operating in the reverse direction may be different between the first execution mode and the second execution mode so that some of the reels 6 rotate in the reverse direction. Further, the light emission mode of the backlight of the reel 6 may be different between the first execution mode and the second execution mode.

  As described above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game effect is controlled in the gaming machine 10 that generates the special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. Effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means executes a decoration game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed corresponding to the game, and then the result is stopped and displayed. In this case, the decoration special result is stopped and displayed in the decoration game, and one decoration special result corresponds to a plurality of special results. Therefore, the same decorative special result can be displayed even with different special results, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when executing a decoration game capable of stopping and displaying a decoration special result corresponding to a plurality of special results, the effect control means is selected according to the type of the special result as an execution mode of the decoration game. The mode can be set. Therefore, the interest that the kind of special result can be grasped from the execution mode is born, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, as the specific execution mode, the effect control unit performs variable display in a state where all of the identification information constituting the special decoration result corresponding to the plurality of special results exists in the display area, and stops and displays the special decoration result. A first execution mode and a second execution mode in which a part or all of the identification information constituting the decoration special result corresponding to a plurality of special results is displayed in a variable manner so that the decoration special result is stopped and displayed. Either of these is selected according to the type of the specific special result. Therefore, it becomes easy to distinguish between the first execution mode and the second execution mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, a variation display device 4 for displaying a decoration game is provided, and the effect control means can change the decoration game displayed on the variation display device 4 according to the gaming state. In a predetermined gaming state, A decoration game in which a decoration special result corresponds to a plurality of special results is displayed, and a decoration game in which one decoration special result corresponds to one special result is displayed except in a predetermined gaming state. Therefore, in a predetermined game state, it is easy to grasp the special result, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, an execution mode of the decorative special figure variation display game when a big hit occurs in irregular variation will be described. The gaming machine of this embodiment is designed so that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a main fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is an irregular fluctuation in a low probability state that is not a specific gaming state. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is irregular fluctuation, is very long, but in the low probability state, it is unlikely that a special result will be derived in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Since the probability is low, a special result may be derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. In this case, a command is sent from the game control device 100 to notify that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 which is information to that effect is longer, and the effect control device 300 changes based on this information. A specific execution mode is set for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game executed on the display device 4.

  FIG. 101 shows an example of a specific execution mode. The state shown in FIG. 101A is a state in which a new special figure 1 variable display game is started in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game that is a big hit in the low probability state is being executed. The variation time of the new special figure 1 fluctuation display game is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and information indicating that is transmitted from the game control device 100. Accordingly, the effect control device 300 sets a specific execution mode for the new special figure 1 variable display game in the variable effect setting process shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 101 (b), in the specific execution mode, the display of fluctuation is performed such that the backlight of each reel 6 is turned off and each reel 6 swings up and down. Further, the display device 41 displays “pounding mode!” Indicating a specific execution mode. Also, the variable display is started in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81.

  When the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends, the variable display of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 ends, and the big hit result mode is stopped and displayed. Accordingly, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is forcibly terminated with the result of the deviation, the fluctuation display of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game display unit 81 is terminated, and the result mode of the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the variation display device 4 displays the outage result mode in a stopped manner.

  When the stop time for displaying the result is over, the special gaming state is started and the fanfare period is reached. Along with the start of the fanfare period, the display device 41 performs a display for prompting a right turn. Further, with the start of the fanfare period, the variable display device 4 performs a variable display for rotating each reel 6 as shown in FIG. 101 (d), and displays the decoration as shown in FIG. 101 (e) during the fanfare period. Special results are stopped. Thereafter, the round is started on condition that the game ball passes through the gate 34, and the special variable winning device is released.

  By setting it as such a specific execution aspect, it becomes possible to derive a special result of irregular fluctuation and to execute a special gaming state without a sense of incongruity. Further, since the results of both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be sequentially displayed on the fluctuation display device 4, the player can confirm the respective results. In particular, it is possible to perform appropriate game progress in a gaming machine using a reel with a low degree of freedom of display.

  In addition, the display of the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation is performed during the special game state, and during the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game, either the main fluctuation or the irregular fluctuation is the special result. Even if both are out of the range, the result of the main fluctuation is always displayed.

  In the high probability state that is a specific gaming state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is designed as a main fluctuation, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is designated as an irregular fluctuation. Since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which is the main fluctuation is short and the special result is derived frequently, the possibility of the special result being derived in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is low, and the specific execution mode Is not set. Of course, when a special result of the special figure 1 variable display game is derived, the same specific execution mode may be set.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended due to the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the variable display device 4 displays the variable when the special figure 2 variable display game ends. Is stopped and displayed in a result form other than the special result, and a special game state based on the small hit is performed as it is. In this case, the stop position of the reel 6 is the position when the stop command is received, and the reel 6 is stopped even when the symbol is not on the valid line.

  In addition, the specific execution mode is set when the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The specific execution mode may be started when the variation display game is shorter than the longest variation time set when the variation display game is lost. In this way, the period for executing the specific execution mode can be set to a certain period.

  From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the game result is a special result, the game machine 10 that generates a special game state advantageous to the player makes a start prize opening. First variation display game execution control means for executing a first variation display game based on a first start winning port 36, a second start winning port 37 serving as a start winning port, and a winning of a game ball to the first start winning port (Game control device 100), second variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) for executing a second variation display game based on winning of a game ball at the second start winning opening, and controlling the effects of the game Effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means executes a decoration game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed corresponding to the game and then the result is stopped and the result of the game is special. Result In this case, the decoration special result is stopped and displayed in the decoration game, and the first variation display game execution control means and the second variation display game execution control means execute the first variation display game and the second variation display game. Forced stop processing that can be executed at the same time and forcibly terminates one of the variable display games when the other variable display game results in a special result while the other variable display game is running The production control means is configured to set the specific execution mode as the execution mode of the decoration game corresponding to the game for which the forced stop process is performed. Therefore, the player can recognize that there is a possibility that a forced stop may occur due to the specific execution mode.

  The effect control means is configured to display, on the variable display device, a decoration game corresponding to one of the first variation display game and the second variation display game determined in advance according to the gaming state. When the target game to be displayed as a game is forcibly stopped by the result of the forced stop process, the result of the shift is displayed on the variable display device, and the variable display device is operated in the special gaming state after that, A special decoration result corresponding to the game result is displayed. Therefore, the result of both games can be shown to the player.

  Next, an effect when a small hit occurs will be described. FIG. 102 shows a case where a small hit occurs in a low probability state that is not a specific gaming state. When the variation time ends from the state in which the special figure 1 variation display game that is a small hit is being executed as shown in FIG. 102 (a), the result is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 102 (b). Here, “123”, which is a special decoration result corresponding to the small hit, is stopped and displayed on the line that rises to the right in the variable display device 4. Also, “123”, which is a special decoration result corresponding to the small hit, is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81.

  Thereafter, a special gaming state based on the small hit is started, but the display of the running storage display unit 84 is erased as shown in FIG. 102 (c), and at the stop time shown in FIG. 102 (b). It is left as displayed. When the special game state is finished, the next special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. In this way, in the low probability state, no special performance is performed in the special game state based on the small hit, so as shown in FIG. The progress of the game is possible.

  FIG. 103 shows a case where a small hit occurs in a high probability state that is a specific gaming state. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the decorative special figure 2 variable display game that is a small hit, each reel 6 swings up and down so that the peach symbol does not deviate from the range of the symbol display window 5 that is the display area. An operating variable display is performed. After that, when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the fluctuation display device 4 stops displaying special decoration results in which peach symbols are arranged on the active line as a result mode. In addition, the decoration special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 stops and displays the result form “123” which is the result form corresponding to the small hit.

  In the special game state based on the small hit, first, in the small hit fanfare period, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), a promotion display 86 for prompting the player to win the special variable winning device is performed instead of the running storage display unit 84. Then, when the small hitting fanfare period ends and the special variation winning device is released, and the game ball wins the special variation winning device, the acquisition indicating the number of winning balls acquired as shown in FIGS. 103 (d) and 103 (e). The value in the number display section 87 is updated for each winning prize. At this time, the numerical value is not updated in the acquisition number display section 85.

  Thereafter, when the special variable winning device is released and the small hitting ending period is reached, a result display 88 indicating the result of the number of winning balls acquired in the special gaming state is displayed as shown in FIG. 103 (f), The value of the number of winning balls acquired in the special game state is added to the acquired number display portion 85. When the small hit ending period ends and the special game state ends, the display of the running memory display unit 84 is resumed, and the next special figure variation display game can be executed.

  Thus, in the high probability state, a special performance is performed in the special game state based on the small hit, so as shown in FIG. 6, the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period are enough time to execute the effect. Thus, it is possible to effectively notify the information on the number of prize balls and to enhance the interest of the game in a specific game state in which many prize balls can be obtained.

  Next, a notification mode in the notification unit 72 having a function of notifying the number of derivations of the special result in the specific period and a function of notifying information regarding the number of prize balls from the end of the special gaming state to the derivation of the next special result. Will be described.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the derivation of the big hit (first special result) in the low probability state is the first time, and in the specific gaming state after the special gaming state ends in the period until the number of big hit derivation reaches five times. It is configured to have a certain high probability state. In the high probability state, derivation of the next big hit becomes easy, and since the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game, the occurrence frequency of the small hit becomes high. In the period from the derivation of the jackpot in this low probability state to the end of the special gaming state based on the derivation of the jackpot for the predetermined number of times, the special gaming state and the high probability state based on the jackpot occur alternately, and the player Since a large number of prize balls can be easily obtained and this is an advantageous period for the player, this period is regarded as an advantageous period.

  As shown in FIG. 2, in the right part of the center case 40, as a notification unit 72 including LEDs capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors, a first notification unit 72a, a second notification unit 72b, a third notification unit 72c, and a fourth A notification unit 72d is provided. A number “1” is attached to the first notification unit 72a, a number “2” is attached to the second notification unit 72b, a number “3” is attached to the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth The number “4” is attached to the notification unit 72d. This number indicates the number of jackpots that occurred in the advantageous period, excluding jackpots derived in a low probability state that triggers the start of the advantageous period. That is, it shows the number of jackpots that occurred in a high probability state. Further, the notification unit 72 indicates the number of jackpots that occurred during the advantageous period due to the lighting state of the LEDs.

  Note that the number of derivation of jackpots during the advantageous period can be grasped by adding 1 to the number of the notification unit, and it can be said that the notification unit reports the number of derivation of jackpots during the advantageous period. Further, the number of remaining derivations per jackpot during the advantageous period can be grasped by subtracting 4 from the number of the notification section, and it can be said that the notification section reports the number of remaining derivations per jackpot during the advantageous period. Of course, you may attach | subject a number to an alerting | reporting part so that it may respond | correspond to the number of derivation | hit of jackpot or the number of remaining derivations.

  FIG. 104 shows an example of a notification mode in the notification unit 72. In a state where a game is being performed in a low probability state, the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth notification unit 72d that form the notification unit 72 are turned off. Then, when the special outcome (first special result) is derived in the low probability state and the special gaming state is started (t31), the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, The fourth notification unit 72d starts blinking. The flashing state indicates that the jackpot corresponding to the notification unit 72 has not yet occurred, and the state where the four notification units 72 are flashing indicates that the number of derivation of the jackpot in the high probability state is zero. It shows that the remaining 4 jackpots can be derived.

  When the special gaming state based on the jackpot generated in the low probability state ends (t32), the state becomes a high probability state. In this high probability state, the game progresses with the special variation 2 display game as the main variation and frequent hits occur, so that the player can acquire a large number of prize balls. The period from the start of the high probability state to the next big hit occurrence (t32 to t33) is set as the first counting period, and the number of prize balls acquired in the first counting period is counted. The counted result is displayed on the acquired number display section 85 of the display device 41.

  When the first big hit in the high probability state that is the next big hit occurs (t33), the first notification unit 72a is turned on, and the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth notification unit 72d. Will remain flashing. Thus, it is shown that the number of derivations per jackpot in the high probability state is one. In addition, the first notification unit 72a is lit in the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the first counting period (t32 to t33) ended by the occurrence of the big hit. That is, in the 1st alerting | reporting part 72, it will be in the state which alert | reported simultaneously the alerting | reporting number of times of the big hit in a high probability state, and the count result in a 1st count period.

  As the luminescent colors for notifying the counting result, five colors of white, blue, yellow, purple, and red are prepared in order from the smallest counting result. Note that the rainbow-colored light emission that sequentially changes each color is used when the derivation of the special result is definitely notified in the production of the special figure variation display game on the display device 41, and is used by the notification unit 72. Therefore, it is not used as a luminescent color for notifying the counting result.

  When the special gaming state based on the first jackpot in the high probability state ends (t34), the high probability state is entered. Then, the period from the start of the high probability state to the next big hit occurrence (t34 to t35) is set as the second counting period, and the number of winning balls acquired in the second counting period is counted. Further, the display of the acquired number display unit 85 is set to 0 with the start of the second counting period, and the counting result in the second counting period is displayed.

  When the second big hit in the high probability state that is the next big hit occurs (t35), the first notification unit 72a and the second notification unit 72b are turned on, and the third notification unit 72c and the fourth notification unit 72d blink. The state remains. Thereby, it is shown that the number of derivations per jackpot in the high probability state is two. In addition, the second notification unit 72b is lit in the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the second counting period (t34 to t35) that is ended by the occurrence of the big hit. About the 1st alerting | reporting part 72a, the state lighted by the luminescent color corresponding to the count result in the 1st count period is maintained, namely, in the 1st alerting | reporting part 72a and the 2nd alerting | reporting part 72b, derivation of the big hit in a high probability state It becomes the state which alert | reported simultaneously the alerting | reporting of the frequency | count and the count result in each count period.

  When the special gaming state based on the second jackpot in the high probability state ends (t36), the state becomes a high probability state. Then, the period from the start of the high probability state to the next big hit occurrence (t36 to t37) is set as the third counting period, and the number of winning balls acquired in the third counting period is counted. Further, the display of the acquired number display unit 85 is set to 0 with the start of the third counting period, and the counting result in the third counting period is displayed.

  When the third big hit in the high probability state that is the next big hit occurs (t37), the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, and the third notification unit 72c are turned on, and the fourth notification unit 72d blinks. The state remains. Thereby, it is shown that the number of derivation of jackpot in the high probability state is three. In addition, the third notification unit 72c is lit in the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the third counting period (t36 to t37) that is ended by the occurrence of the big hit. About the 1st alerting | reporting part 72a, the state which lighted by the luminescent color corresponding to the count result in a 1st count period is maintained, and the state which lighted by the luminescent color corresponding to the count result in the 2nd count period about the 2nd alerting | reporting part 72b Is maintained. That is, in the 1st alerting | reporting part 72a, the 2nd alerting | reporting part 72b, and the 3rd alerting | reporting part 72c, it will be in the state which alert | reported simultaneously the alerting | reporting number of times of the big hit in a high probability state, and the count result in each count period.

  When the special gaming state based on the third big hit in the high probability state ends (t38), the state becomes a high probability state. Then, the period from the start of the high probability state to the next big hit occurrence (t38 to t39) is set as the fourth counting period, and the number of winning balls acquired in the fourth counting period is counted. Further, the display of the acquired number display unit 85 is set to 0 with the start of the fourth counting period, and the counting result in the fourth counting period is displayed.

  When the fourth big hit in the high probability state that is the next big hit occurs (t39), the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth notification unit 72d are turned on. Thereby, it is shown that the number of derivations per jackpot in the high probability state is four. In addition, the fourth notification unit 72d is lit in the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the fourth counting period (t38 to t39) ended by the occurrence of the big hit. About the 1st alerting | reporting part 72a, the state which lighted by the luminescent color corresponding to the count result in a 1st count period is maintained, and the state which lighted by the luminescent color corresponding to the count result in the 2nd count period about the 2nd alerting | reporting part 72b Is maintained, and the third notification unit 72c is lit in the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the third counting period. That is, in the 1st alerting | reporting part 72a, the 2nd alerting | reporting part 72b, the 3rd alerting | reporting part 72c, and the 4th alerting | reporting part 72d alert | report simultaneously the alerting | reporting number of times of the big hit in a high probability state, and the count result in each count period. It will be in the state.

  When the special gaming state based on the fourth big hit in the high probability state ends (t40), the low probability state is reached and the advantageous period ends. And the 1st alerting | reporting part 72a, the 2nd alerting | reporting part 72b, the 3rd alerting | reporting part 72c, and the 4th alerting | reporting part 72d are light-extinguished, and the display apparatus 41 will be a display in a low probability state.

  In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by notifying the number of prize balls acquired in the period until the next first special result is derived in the advantageous period. In particular, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the player's ball is increased even during the period until the next first special result is derived in the advantageous period, while the ball is decreased as in the conventional case. It has a game that is different from that of waiting for the derivation of the next special result. For this reason, the matter of how much prize balls are acquired in the period until the next first special result is derived in the advantageous period is also an important matter relating to the player's profit. By notifying the number of prize balls acquired during this period by the notification unit 72, the amount of profits acquired by the player can be shown in an easy-to-understand manner, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Count effect setting processing]
FIG. 105 shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this count effect setting process, first, it is determined whether it is an advantageous period (step C501). If it is not this advantageous period (step C501; N), the count effect setting process ends. In this case, the game ball is won in the special variation winning device in the special game state based on the small hits generated in the low probability state, and no special performance is performed.

  If it is an advantageous period (step C501; Y), the acquired winning ball counter is updated by +15 (step C502), and the total acquired number counter is updated by +15 (step C503). The acquired winning ball counter counts the number of winning balls acquired by winning a special variable winning device during a predetermined period in the advantageous period. Further, the total number-of-acquisition counter counts the number of winning balls acquired by winning the special variable winning device during the advantageous period. Here, since 15 prize balls are generated by winning the special variable prize winning device, each counter is updated by +15.

  Thereafter, the display of the acquired number display section 85 of the display device 41 is updated (step C504), and the count effect setting process is ended. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired in the high probability state is displayed on the number-of-acquisition display section 85, but the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state in the special gaming state is displayed on the number-of-acquisition display section 85. You may do it. The total number of acquisitions is not displayed but may be displayed.

[Broadcast information setting process]
FIG. 106 shows the notification information setting process performed in the board effect setting process (step C20) in the main process described above. In this notification information setting process, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the advantageous period (t31 in FIG. 104) (step C511). When it is the start timing of the advantageous period (step C511; Y), the display of the notification unit 72 is started (step C512). Thereby, the blinking display of the alerting | reporting part 72 is started. Next, the acquired winning ball counter area is cleared to 0 (step C513), the total acquired number counter area is cleared to 0 (step C514), and the notification information setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of the advantageous period (step C511; N), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the advantageous period (t40 in FIG. 104) (step C515). When it is the end timing of the advantageous period (step C515; Y), the display of the notification unit 72 is ended (step C516). Thereby, the notification unit 72 is turned off. Next, the value of the winning prize ball counter is saved as history information (step C517). The number of winning balls acquired in the last special gaming state in the advantageous period is recorded in the winning prize counter at this timing, and this value is saved as history information. Then, the value of the total acquisition number counter is saved as history information (step C518), and the notification information setting process is terminated. The total number of winning counter records the number of prize balls from the start of the advantageous period, and saves this value as history information.

  On the other hand, when it is not the end timing of the advantageous period (step C515; N), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the first special gaming state. Here, the start timing of the special gaming state when the advantageous period is started is not included, and the timings of t33, t35, t37, and t39 in FIG. 104 are applicable.

  When it is the start timing of the first special gaming state (step C519; Y), the light emission mode of the notification unit is selected and set from the value of the winning prize counter (step C520). In the acquired prize ball counter at this timing, the number of prize balls acquired from the end of the previous special game state to the start of the current special game state is recorded, and the light emission of the corresponding notification unit 72 based on this value is recorded. Select and set the aspect. Thereby, the corresponding alerting | reporting part 72 will be in a lighting state from a blinking state.

  Next, the value of the acquired prize ball counter is saved as history information (step C521). Thereby, the number of prize balls acquired from the end of the previous special game state to the start of the current special game state is saved as history information. Thereafter, the acquired prize ball counter area is cleared to 0 (step C522), and the notification information setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of the first special gaming state (step C519; N), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the first special gaming state (step C523). Here, the end timing of the special gaming state when the advantageous period ends is not included, and the timings t32, t34, t35, and t36 in FIG. 104 correspond. If it is not the end timing of the first special gaming state (step C523; N), the notification information setting process is ended.

  When it is the end timing of the first special gaming state (step C523; Y), the value of the acquired prize ball counter is saved as history information (step C524). Thereby, the value of the number of prize balls acquired in the special gaming state ended this time is saved as history information. Thereafter, the acquired prize ball counter area is cleared to 0 (step C525), and the notification information setting process is terminated.

  In addition, in the special game state based on the fourth jackpot in the high probability state that will be performed at the end of the advantageous period, the counting result of the number of prize balls in each counting period in the advantageous period, and the type of jackpot in the advantageous period The display device 41 displays the results of the game during the advantageous period, such as information on the type and number of small hits, the result of counting the number of prize balls in each special gaming state, and the result of counting the number of prize balls during the entire advantageous period. You may do it. When notifying the result of counting the number of prize balls in each special gaming state or the result of counting the number of prize balls in all the advantageous periods, the prize ball obtained in the special gaming state performed at the end of the advantageous period In order to obtain information on the number, notification is made after the remaining ball processing in the special gaming state is completed. In addition, for the special gaming state performed at the end of the advantageous period in order to perform this notification, the ending time may be set longer than other special gaming states. In the notification of these pieces of information, it is possible to use history information that stores the counting results in each counting period. The history information may be referred to at any timing by the player operating the effect button 25 or the like.

  Moreover, although the alerting | reporting part 72 alert | reported the number of prize balls acquired with the luminescent color, you may alert | report by operation | movement. For example, the larger the number of prize balls acquired, the greater the amount of protrusion in the center direction of the game area, or the larger the rotation angle may be. In addition, although the acquisition number display unit 85 displays the counting result in each counting period, the counting result in each counting period in one advantageous period may be added, or in the special game state in one advantageous period. The total number of acquisitions including the number of acquisitions may be displayed.

  In addition, although the number of winning balls by winning in the special variable winning device is counted, the number of winning balls by winning in other winning ports may be added up. In this case, the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 the number of winning balls based on winning in each winning opening. Further, the number of game balls consumed by the launch may be subtracted so that the net increase during the counting period can be counted. In this case, the number of shot balls is counted and subtracted from the number of winning balls acquired.

  Further, two display units may be provided in one notification unit 72, the counting result in the counting period corresponding to one may be displayed, and the type of the first special result derived may be displayed in the other. The counting period may include a special gaming state period. For example, the first counting period is a period (t31 to t33) from the start of the special gaming state based on the first special result derived in the low probability state to the derivation of the next first special result, and the second counting period is the second counting period. The period from the end of one counting period to the derivation of the next first special result (t33 to t35) may be set, and similarly, the third counting period may be set to t35 to t37, and the fourth counting period may be set to t37 to t40. Of course, the division of the counting period can be arbitrarily set, and other divisions may be used.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37), and the game results in a special result, In the gaming machine 10 that generates a special game state advantageous to the player, the production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the production of the game, and the game result becomes the first special result (big hit) of the special results. Probability setting means (game control device 100) for setting the probability to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state, the probability setting means in the low probability state The derivation of the first special result is the first time, and the game is executed in a high probability state during the period from the derivation of the first special result until the number of derivations of the first special result reaches a predetermined number of times, The production control means is the first special result. In the period from the derivation of the first special result in the low probability state to the end of the special gaming state based on the first special result of the predetermined number of times Information on the result of counting the number of prize balls in a predetermined period of a certain advantageous period can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the advantageous period in which the player can acquire a large number of prize balls.

  The effect control means can count the number of prize balls in the counting period, which is a period from the end of the special gaming state in the advantageous period to the derivation of the next first special result, and a plurality of counting periods in one advantageous period. It is possible to notify each of the counting results at. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the advantageous period in which the player can acquire a large number of prize balls. In addition, the number of acquisitions in a state other than the special game state where the number of acquisitions is easily influenced by luck can be grasped, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the effect control means displays the number of derivations of the first special result or the remaining number of times until the predetermined number of times is reached by using the notifying unit 72 corresponding one-to-one with the derivation of the first special result in the advantageous period. Thus, the information related to the counting result of the number of prize balls in the counting period is displayed on the notification unit 72 corresponding to the derivation of the first special result that triggers the end of the counting period. Therefore, it is possible to notify the result of each counting period in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, the first variation display game is executed based on the winning of the first starting winning port 36 that forms the starting winning port, the second starting winning port 37 that forms the starting winning port, and the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port. One variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) and second variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) for executing the second variation display game based on the winning of a game ball in the second start winning opening. And a specific game state generating means (game control device 100) for generating a specific game state in which the execution time of the second variation display game is set to be shorter than the normal state during the period of high probability state. When the game result is the second special result among the special results, the second special game state is generated as a special game state advantageous to the player, and the second special display state in the second variable display game is configured. Special conclusion The probability that the first special result is derived is higher than the probability that the first special result is derived, and the effect control means counts the number of prize balls generated in the second special gaming state. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the advantageous period in which the player can acquire a large number of prize balls. In addition, the number of acquisitions in a state other than the special game state where the number of acquisitions is easily influenced by luck can be grasped, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the effect by game points will be described. Game points are given by satisfying a predetermined condition in the game, and as the number of game points increases, there is a higher possibility that a state advantageous to the player such as derivation of special results will occur. It has become. The addition of game points can be executed at any timing, such as when a start memory is generated, when a special figure variation display game is started, when a reach state is generated, or when a specific effect is executed. Further, game points can be accumulated over a plurality of special figure variation display games.

  In the present embodiment, an expectation level that is likely to be a big hit by a game point is suggested, and the expectation level is suggested by a game point at a predetermined notification timing in the target special figure variation display game. It has come to be. FIG. 107 (a) shows the degree of expectation suggested according to the value of game points. When the game point is 20000 points or more, the occurrence of the reach state is notified, and when the game point is 30000 points or more, the occurrence of the SP reach state is notified. Further, when the number of game points is 40000 points or more, the occurrence of the big hit is definitely notified, and when it is 50000 points or more, the 16R big hit is notified.

  FIGS. 107 (b) to (f) show an example of giving and using game points. As shown in FIG. 107 (b), game points can be awarded at the start timing of the special figure variation display game. In this case, each display unit of the point notification unit 73 is sequentially turned on like a roulette with the start of the special figure variation display game, and the display unit corresponding to the point to be given is turned on. Here, 100 points are given. Further, the given points are added to the cumulative value notification unit 74. Here, 100 points are added while the accumulated points are 0 points.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), game points can be awarded at the timing when the special figure variation display game reaches the reach state. In this case, with the occurrence of the reach state, each display unit of the point notification unit 73 is sequentially turned on like roulette, and the display unit corresponding to the point to be given is turned on. Here, it is shown that the points given are 10,000 points. Further, in the cumulative value notification unit 74, 10,000 points are added to 10100 points from the state where the cumulative points are 100 points.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), game points can be awarded at the timing when a new start-up memory is generated. Here, as a result of the prior determination about the new start memory that has occurred, it has been found that the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is out of place and generates SP reach. Therefore, when determining the points to be given, the cumulative value of points is determined to be less than 40000 points. Here, 5000 points are given, and the accumulated value notification unit 74 adds 15 points to 15100 points from a state where the accumulated points are 10100 points. In the decoration start memory display corresponding to the start memory in the memory display unit 83, a pre-reading notice effect for changing the display mode is performed.

  Thereafter, a plurality of points are given, and a predetermined notification timing is started in a state where the accumulated value is 37600 points as shown in FIG. 107 (e). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 107 (f), one light emitting unit of the expectation degree notification unit 75 is turned on corresponding to 10,000 points, and here, three light emitting units are turned on. Thereby, it is notified that SP reach occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game being executed. Here, the fractions less than 10000 points are erased, but may be left. The control related to the game points as described above is performed in the board effect setting process (step C20) in the main process shown in FIG.

  The board effect device 44 may be operated according to the number of lightings of the expectation degree notification unit 75. Further, although game points are added at a predetermined timing, they may be subtracted at the predetermined timing. In addition, the special figure fluctuation display game subject to the advance notice by the use of the game points is not limited to the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory that has been found to be a special result or reach by prior determination, and can be arbitrarily set. is there. For example, the game points may be digested by performing notification in a special figure variation display game that is appropriately deviated so that the accumulated game points do not increase too much. In the present embodiment, when it exceeds 30000 points, the occurrence of reach will be notified, so it is preferable to digest game points by notification before exceeding 30000 points. In other words, if notification is not performed even after exceeding 30000 points, it is in a state of being notified that a reach or a special result will occur even if notification is not performed.

  Further, the cumulative value notification unit 74 may be used as the acquisition number display unit 85. For example, the game points and the number of acquisitions may be displayed in parallel. In addition, it is possible not to perform the effect by the game point in the specific game state, and to use the cumulative value notification unit 74 as the acquisition number display unit 85 in the specific game state.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when one of the variable display games has a special result while one of the variable display games is being executed, one of the variable display games is forcibly ended with the result of losing. Although the forced stop process is performed, one variable display game is interrupted until the end of the special game state based on the other special result, and one of the variable display games interrupted after the special game state is ended You may make it resume. In addition, depending on the type of special result, it may be selected whether to forcibly end or stop with the result of the deviation. For example, when the first special result (big hit) is derived in the other variation display game, one variation display game is forcibly terminated with the result of losing, and the second special result is obtained in the other variation display game. When (small hit) is derived, one of the variable display games may be interrupted.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the correspondence between the special result and the decoration special result differs depending on the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the decoration special results other than in the specific gaming state are the same as those in FIG. 98 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the decoration special results in the specific gaming state are The special decoration result in which three peach symbols are arranged corresponds to 16R big hit, 10R big hit, and small hit, and the special result composed of numerals does not appear.

  In the special display variation display game in a specific game state, the special decoration result displayed is the same regardless of the special result, but the variation mode is selected according to the special result. The special result can be discriminated by the variation mode until the result is derived. In the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 94, a decoration special result to be used is selected depending on whether or not the game state is a specific game state, and a variation mode corresponding to the special result is selected for selection of a variation pattern in the case of the specific game state. I am doing so.

  The execution mode of the decoration special figure variable display game on the variable display device 4 in the specific gaming state is as shown in FIG. 100. When the result is out of play or small hit, the second example as shown in FIG. The variable display is performed in one execution mode, and the decoration special result in which peach symbols are arranged on the effective line of the variable display device 4 as shown in FIG. As a result of the failure as shown in e), the display is stopped and displayed. Also, if the result is out of place or a big hit, the fluctuation display is performed in the second execution mode as shown in FIG. 100C, and the outage result mode as shown in FIG. In FIG. 100 (f), the decorative special result in which peach symbols are arranged on the effective line of the variable display device 4 is stopped and displayed as a result mode.

  As described above, the result mode in the variable display device 4 is the same regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit, so that the player can easily grasp the occurrence of the special gaming state. In particular, in the specific gaming state, the variation time is shortened and the special figure variation display game is executed at a high frequency, and since the small hits occur frequently and the occurrence interval of the big hits is short, the occurrence frequency of special results is high. Yes. In such a gaming state, the player only needs to be aware that the special variable winning device is released if the special result of the peach symbol decoration is stopped and displayed. Since a margin for turning the consciousness to the opening of the variable winning device is created, it is possible to effectively enhance the interest of the specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, a common decorative special result is used for each special result, but the effective lines arranged according to the special result may be different. For example, in the case of 16R big hit, the peach symbol may be arranged on the middle line in the case of 10R big hit, and in the case of 10R big hit, the peach symbol may be arranged in the lower line. In addition, the execution mode may be different for 16R big hit and 10R big hit so that these can be discriminated.

  In addition, the special decoration results in the special display 1 variable display game display unit 81 and the special display 2 variable display game display unit 82 are the special display shown in FIG. 98 (a) regardless of the game state and the special figure type. By using the result, it is possible to determine the type of the special result even in the specific gaming state. However, the decorative special result shown in FIG.

  As described above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game effect is controlled in the gaming machine 10 that generates the special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. Effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means executes a decoration game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed corresponding to the game, and then the result is stopped and displayed. In this case, the decoration special result is stopped and displayed in the decoration game, and the correspondence between the special result and the decoration special result can be made different depending on the game state. Therefore, a decoration game having a different taste can be executed according to the gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the effect control means is configured so that one decoration special result corresponds to one special result except for the predetermined gaming state, and one decoration special result corresponds to a plurality of special results in the predetermined gaming state. It becomes that. Therefore, the same decorative special result can be displayed even with different special results, and the fun of the game can be improved. In addition, in a predetermined game state, it is easy to grasp the special result, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when the decoration control result corresponding to a plurality of special results is stopped and displayed as a result of the decoration game in a predetermined gaming state, the production control means according to the type of the special result as the execution mode of the decoration game This means that the specific execution mode to be selected can be set. Therefore, the interest that the kind of special result can be grasped from the execution mode is born, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 36 1st starting prize opening (starting prize opening)
37 Second starting prize opening (starting prize opening)
38 First Special Variable Prize Winner (Special Variable Prize Winner)
39 Second special variable prize device (Special variable prize device)
100 Game control device (game control means, first variation display game execution control means, second variation display game execution control means, specific game state generation means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result,
Game control means for overall control of the game;
A special variable winning device that is opened in the special gaming state,
The game control means includes
A fanfare period, which is a period from the start of the special gaming state to the start of opening of the special variable winning device;
It is possible to set an ending period that is a period from the end of opening of the last special variable winning device in the special gaming state to the end of the special gaming state,
Even in the special gaming state based on the same special result, it is possible to vary the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period according to the gaming state when the special result is derived. A gaming machine characterized by being. A first start winning opening that forms the start winning opening;
A second starting prize opening that forms the starting prize opening;
First variation display game execution control means for executing a first variation display game based on winning of a game ball in the first start winning opening;
Second variation display game execution control means for executing a second variation display game based on winning of a game ball in the second start winning opening;
Specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the execution time of the second variation display game is set to be shorter than the normal state;
The game control means includes
The length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period in the special gaming state based on the same special result is set to a special result as compared with the case where the gaming state when the special result is derived is not the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game state when derived is longer when the game state is the specific game state. The special results include
A first special result capable of changing the probability derived according to the gaming state;
There is a second special result with a constant probability of being derived regardless of the gaming state,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the probability that the second special result is derived is higher than the probability that the first special result is derived.

Images